mirror of
https://git.lyx.org/repos/lyx.git
synced 2024-11-06 00:10:59 +00:00
f1b40f9867
- Additional.lyx: update description of multiple columns - multicol.lyx: remove this file because its content is now completely in Additional.lyx (We once described multiple columns in 3 different files, Additional.lyx, Customization.lyx and multicol.lyx. We now have only one place.) git-svn-id: svn://svn.lyx.org/lyx/lyx-devel/trunk@39355 a592a061-630c-0410-9148-cb99ea01b6c8
18284 lines
323 KiB
Plaintext
18284 lines
323 KiB
Plaintext
#LyX 2.0 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
|
||
\lyxformat 413
|
||
\begin_document
|
||
\begin_header
|
||
\textclass scrbook
|
||
\begin_preamble
|
||
% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
|
||
%
|
||
% This preamble is designed to ensure that the manual prints
|
||
% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
|
||
% parts of the manual may not print out as expected. If you
|
||
% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
|
||
% the documentation team
|
||
% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
|
||
|
||
% if pdflatex is used
|
||
\usepackage{ifpdf}
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
|
||
% set fonts for nicer pdf view
|
||
\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}
|
||
{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
|
||
|
||
\fi % end if pdflatex is used
|
||
|
||
% the pages of the TOC are numbered roman
|
||
% and a PDF-bookmark for the TOC is added
|
||
\pagenumbering{roman}
|
||
\let\myTOC\tableofcontents
|
||
\renewcommand{\tableofcontents}{%
|
||
\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
|
||
\myTOC
|
||
\cleardoublepage
|
||
\pagenumbering{arabic}}
|
||
|
||
% used for multi-column text
|
||
\usepackage{multicol}
|
||
|
||
% extra space for tables
|
||
\newcommand{\extratablespace}[1]{\noalign{\vskip#1}}
|
||
\end_preamble
|
||
\options fleqn,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
|
||
\use_default_options false
|
||
\begin_modules
|
||
logicalmkup
|
||
theorems-ams
|
||
theorems-ams-extended
|
||
multicol
|
||
\end_modules
|
||
\maintain_unincluded_children false
|
||
\begin_local_layout
|
||
Format 7
|
||
InsetLayout CharStyle:MenuItem
|
||
LyxType charstyle
|
||
LabelString menu
|
||
LatexType command
|
||
LatexName menuitem
|
||
Font
|
||
Family Sans
|
||
EndFont
|
||
Preamble
|
||
\newcommand*{\menuitem}[1]{{\sffamily #1}}
|
||
EndPreamble
|
||
End
|
||
\end_local_layout
|
||
\language polish
|
||
\language_package default
|
||
\inputencoding auto
|
||
\fontencoding global
|
||
\font_roman default
|
||
\font_sans default
|
||
\font_typewriter default
|
||
\font_default_family default
|
||
\use_non_tex_fonts false
|
||
\font_sc false
|
||
\font_osf false
|
||
\font_sf_scale 100
|
||
\font_tt_scale 100
|
||
|
||
\graphics default
|
||
\default_output_format default
|
||
\output_sync 0
|
||
\bibtex_command default
|
||
\index_command default
|
||
\paperfontsize 12
|
||
\spacing single
|
||
\use_hyperref true
|
||
\pdf_title "LyX's Additional Features manual"
|
||
\pdf_author "LyX Team"
|
||
\pdf_subject "LyX's additional features documentation"
|
||
\pdf_keywords "LyX, Documentation, Additional"
|
||
\pdf_bookmarks true
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksopen false
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
|
||
\pdf_breaklinks false
|
||
\pdf_pdfborder false
|
||
\pdf_colorlinks true
|
||
\pdf_backref false
|
||
\pdf_pdfusetitle false
|
||
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
|
||
\papersize default
|
||
\use_geometry false
|
||
\use_amsmath 1
|
||
\use_esint 0
|
||
\use_mhchem 1
|
||
\use_mathdots 1
|
||
\cite_engine basic
|
||
\use_bibtopic false
|
||
\use_indices false
|
||
\paperorientation portrait
|
||
\suppress_date false
|
||
\use_refstyle 0
|
||
\index Indeks
|
||
\shortcut idx
|
||
\color #008000
|
||
\end_index
|
||
\secnumdepth 3
|
||
\tocdepth 3
|
||
\paragraph_separation indent
|
||
\paragraph_indentation default
|
||
\quotes_language german
|
||
\papercolumns 1
|
||
\papersides 2
|
||
\paperpagestyle headings
|
||
\tracking_changes false
|
||
\output_changes false
|
||
\html_math_output 0
|
||
\html_css_as_file 0
|
||
\html_be_strict true
|
||
\end_header
|
||
|
||
\begin_body
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Title
|
||
LyX -- Zaawansowane możliwości
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Author
|
||
by the LyX Team
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Opiekunem tego pliku jest aktualnie
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\noun default
|
||
.
|
||
Proszę wysyłać komentarze i poprawki błędów na podany adres.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
polskie tłumaczenie:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Opiekunem wersji polskiej tego pliku jest aktualnie
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak,
|
||
\noun default
|
||
tlu@technodat.com.pl.
|
||
Proszę wysyłać komentarze i poprawki błędów na podany adres.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
przy współpracy Pawła Dziekońskiego
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Date
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset toc
|
||
LatexCommand tableofcontents
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podręcznik
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Zaawansowana Edycja
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, który właśnie czytasz jest właściwie drugą częścią
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Powód podziału jest prosty:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznik Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest już dość obszerny i zawiera opis wszystkich podstawowych funkcji,
|
||
które trzeba poznać do przygotowania większości dokumentów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX Team ma długoterminowy cel tworzenia rozszerzeń LyX-a przez różne pliki
|
||
konfiguracyjne.
|
||
To oznacza, że jeśli chcesz obsługiwać pakiet LaTeX-a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Fizzwizzle
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to możesz utworzyć plik układu dla tego pakietu bez konieczności dokonywania
|
||
samodzielnie zmian w LyX-ie.
|
||
Już przyczyniliśmy się do powstania kilku nowych funkcji tą drogą.
|
||
Ten podręcznik, to jest miejsce, gdzie wszystko to udokumentowano.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ten podręcznik dokumentuje także kilka funkcji specjalnych, jak faksowanie,
|
||
kontrola wersji, obsługa SGML-u, które wymagają dodatkowego oprogramowania
|
||
do poprawnej pracy.
|
||
Ostatni rozdział traktuje o narzędziach i sposobach LaTeX-a, które można
|
||
zastosować do wykończenia Twoich dokumentów używając funkcji LaTeX-a.
|
||
Poza tym LyX jest tylko edytorem WYSIWYM i będzie zawsze tylko interfejsem
|
||
do pewnych funkcji LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oczywiście, z udokumentowanymi wszystkimi funkcjami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli nie przeczytałeś jeszcze wprowadzenia, to właśnie czytasz niewłaściwy
|
||
podręcznik.
|
||
Wprowadzenie jest pierwszym miejscem, od którego powinieneś zacząć.
|
||
Opisuje on notację i format wszystkich podręczników.
|
||
Powinieneś gruntownie zaznajomić się z
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznikiem Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i wszystkimi podstawowymi funkcjami LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wiele rozdziałów w tym dokumencie jest niezależnymi artykułami napisanymi
|
||
przez pojedyncze osoby i są one odpowiednio zaznaczone.
|
||
Tymi osobami są generalnie ci, którzy napisali nowy plik układu (layout)
|
||
dla nowej klasy dokumentu lub pakietu LaTeX-a, lub zaimplementowali jakąś
|
||
funkcję.
|
||
Jeśli nie wspomniano o autorze w rozdziale lub sekcji to znaczy, że został
|
||
napisany przez LyX Documentation Team.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszy rozdział stanowi suplement do narzędzi edycyjnych LyX-a, nie ujętych
|
||
w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i przeznaczony jest dla bardziej zaawansowanych użytkowników.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie rozdziały tego podręcznika są w różnym stopniu, ale jednak, opisują
|
||
współpracę LyX-a i LaTeX-a, pierwszy rozdział opisuje wewnętrzną pracę
|
||
LyX-a, jak prosto LyX tworzy kod LaTeX-a jeśli chcesz.
|
||
To jest oczywiste dla wielu użytkowników LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
LyX i LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Jak LyX używa LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To jest rozdział dla TeX-ników i dla ciekawych LaTeX-a.
|
||
Wyjaśnimy w nim jak pracują LyX i LaTeX tworząc wynikowe dokumenty do druku.
|
||
Tylko w tym miejscu i tylko w tym podręczniku zakładamy Twoją znajomość
|
||
LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Od jakiegoś czasu LyX-a nazywamy ,,WYSIWYM frontendem do LaTeX'', ale to
|
||
nie jest dalej prawdą.
|
||
Istnieją również inne frontendy do LaTeX-a.
|
||
To są generalnie edytory potrafiące uruchomić LaTeX-a i zaznaczać błędy
|
||
podczas edycji.
|
||
Mimo że LyX
|
||
\emph on
|
||
jest
|
||
\emph default
|
||
edytorem i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
potrafi
|
||
\emph default
|
||
uruchomić LaTeX-a, i również zaznaczać błędy, i także wiele, wiele więcej.
|
||
Dzięki koncepcji WYSIWYM
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
What You See Is What You Mean -- dostajesz to o co Ci chodzi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, nie musisz znać LaTeX-a aby efektywnie używać LyX-a.
|
||
LyX posiada także kilka rozszerzeń do LaTeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The Team did this for parsing/coding reasons.
|
||
The new macros allow LyX to more easily produce LaTeX code and ensure that
|
||
the resulting code is correct.
|
||
Nothing that you, the user, need worry about.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Spróbuj kiedyś wybrać polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
i spójrz na preambułę utworzonego pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Będziesz mógł zauważyć różne nowe makra zdefiniowane specjalnie przez LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Trochę historii: kiedyś wszystkie makra znajdowały się w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyx.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pewnego dnia The Team zdecydował, że utworzone pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
powinny być bardziej przenośne.
|
||
Tak teraz makra są umieszczone w preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Jednak to wszystko dzieje się przeźroczyście dla użytkownika.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mamy kilka poleceń, które automatycznie wywołują LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oto one:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
PostScript/PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Aktualizuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Aktualizuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Postscript/PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Drukuj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tylko te polecenia wywołują LaTeX-a jeśli dokument się zmienił od czasu
|
||
ostatniego uruchomienia LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podczas uruchomienia LaTeX-a podczas edycji pliku, LyX wykonuje następujące
|
||
czynności:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Konwertuje dokument
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
do LaTeX-a i zapisuje plik z rozszerzeniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Uruchamia LaTeX-a z plikiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
(być może kilka razy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli są błędy , to zaznacza je w dokumencie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli uruchamiasz LaTeX-a poleceniem podglądu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
DVI
|
||
\family default
|
||
, LyX uruchamia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
xdvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
z plikiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli użyłeś polecenia podglądu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PostScript
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rukuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
, LyX wykonuje dwa kroki więcej:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Uruchamia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
do konwersji pliku Dvi do pliku postscriptowego:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podglądu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, plik wyjściowy ma rozszerzenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.ps_tmp
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rukuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
, plik wyjściowy ma rozszerzenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jak można było się spodziewać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wywołuje
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ghostview
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub wysyła plik postscriptowy do drukarki.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
,,Pomocy! LyX utworzył nieczytelny plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
!''
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użytkownicy LaTeX-a będą krzyczeć to przez całą noc, gdy deklaracje LyX-a
|
||
są nie do wykorzystania --- oni po prostu nie czytali dokumentacji do LyX-a
|
||
(RTFM!)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\noun default
|
||
: I know a certain faculty member who actually did complain to me that LyX
|
||
doesn't generate LaTeX files.
|
||
Ain't it funny how, sometimes, faculty are the worst at reading instructions?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Należy postawić sprawę jasno.
|
||
LyX produkuje dwa rodzaje plików LaTeX-owych.
|
||
Jedne są czytelne dla ludzi.
|
||
Inne są czytelne dla LyX-a.
|
||
Za każdym wywołaniem LaTeX-a przez LyX-a, tworzy on plik LaTeX-a, który
|
||
może być łatwo skanowany w celu poszukiwania błędów.
|
||
W rezultacie plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest czytelny dla ludzi.
|
||
Nie próbuj go czytać.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz mieć plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby móc wysłać go koledze, to wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powtórzymy to jeszcze raz, specjalnie dla podkreślenia :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.23cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
Jeśli chcesz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
móc wysłać koledze, to wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.23cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Importowanie plików LaTeX-a do LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:Importowanie-plików-LaTeX-a"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can import a LaTeX file into LyX by using the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
mport\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
command in LyX.
|
||
This will call a program named
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
---which will create a file
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
from the file
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
---and then open that file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\lang english
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
will translate most legal LaTeX, but not everything.
|
||
It will leave things it doesn't understand in TeX mode, so after translating
|
||
a file with
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can look for red text and hand-edit it to look right.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If you just want to put a piece of LaTeX code into a LyX file, see
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:latexcodes"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wstawianie poleceń LaTeX-a do dokumentów LyX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:latexcodes"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
To jest raczej ważny punkt: możesz zawsze wstawić kod LaTeX-a do dowolnego
|
||
dokumentu LyX-a.
|
||
LyX po prostu nie może i prawdopodobnie nigdy nie będzie mógł wyświetlić
|
||
wszystkich możliwych konstrukcji LaTeX.
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz wstawić polecenie LaTeX-a do dokumentu LyX-a, to użyj
|
||
wstawki ERT, którą możesz wstawić do dokumentu poleceniem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wstawka ERT może występować w trzech formach:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
collapsed
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
open
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pierwsze dwie formy są podobne do innych rozwijalnych wstawek (takich jak
|
||
np.
|
||
wstawka przypisu) i są wygodne do zaznaczenia poleceń LaTeX-a.
|
||
Forma
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
wstawki wyświetla jej zawartość, co jest wygodne dla krótkich fragmentów
|
||
kodu LaTeX-a.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
% tak jak ten
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przełączać się pomiędzy tymi formami przez kliknięcie prawym klawiszem
|
||
myszy na wstawce.
|
||
Uwaga jeśli chcesz więcej niż jeden wiersz poleceń LaTeX-a, to nie możesz
|
||
korzystać z trybu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj jest przykład wstawienia poleceń LaTeX-a w dokumencie LyX-a.
|
||
Oto kod:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}{ll}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is an example for a minipage environment.
|
||
You
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
can put nearly everything in it, even (non-floating)
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
figures and tables.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
&
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{verbatim}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This ...
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{verbatim}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{tabular}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstawka ERT zawierająca powyższy tekst jest umieszczona bezpośrednio po
|
||
tym akapicie.
|
||
Jeśli czytasz ten podręcznik w LyX-ie, to zobaczysz tylko przycisk z czerwonym
|
||
tekstem.
|
||
Czytając drukowaną wersję tego podręcznika zobaczysz rezultaty:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}{ll}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
This is an example for a minipage environment.
|
||
You can put nearly everything in it, even (non-floating) figures and tables.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
&
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{verbatim}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
This ...
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{verbatim}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{tabular}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ponadto możesz utworzyć oddzielny plik zawierający skomplikowaną strukturę
|
||
LaTeX-a i dołączyć go poleceniem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ołącz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
(powinieneś wybrać opcję
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Zalecamy abyś dołączał pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, o których
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wiesz
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, że są poprawne.
|
||
W innym wypadku będziesz miał sporo zajęcia z wyszukiwaniem błędów\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Kilka ostatnich uwag o wyróżnieniu:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wewnątrz LyX-a, kod LaTeX-a pojawia się
|
||
\emph on
|
||
na czerwono
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
LyX
|
||
\emph on
|
||
nie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
sprawdza poprawności Twojego kodu LaTeX-owego,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Staraj się nie odkrywać koła na nowo.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Na koniec dwie uwagi.
|
||
Po pierwsze, LyX posiada niewiele funkcji całkowicie wbudowanych ale będzie
|
||
więcej.
|
||
Bądź pewien, sprawdzając podręcznik, że danej funkcji LyX nie posiada zanim
|
||
zaczniesz kodować ją w LaTeX-u
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga od
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\noun default
|
||
-a: I seem to do this an awful lot.
|
||
Sat down and merrily began coding something to print out labels, only to
|
||
learn that there were already 2 different LaTeX packages to do this.
|
||
Worse yet - I had them already!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Po drugie istnieje wiele pakietów LaTeX-a począwszy od składu etykiet czy
|
||
kopert do ładnych wielostronicowych tabel.
|
||
Przejrzyj archiwum CTAN aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz zrobić trochę dzikich i ładnych rzeczy wewnątrz dokumentu,
|
||
bądź pewien swoich konstrukcji korzystając z dobrej książki o LaTeX-u.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pewna liczba poleceń LaTeX-a musi być umieszczona przed początkiem tekstu.
|
||
Powinny one zostać umieszczone w preambule co opisano w następnej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Preambuła LyX-a i LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
O preambule LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli już znasz LaTeX-a, to nie potrzebujesz tutaj wyjaśnienia do czego
|
||
służy preambuła.
|
||
Jeśli nie wiesz, to dajemy Ci kilka porad -- zalecamy abyś znów zapoznał
|
||
się z książką o LaTeX-u aby poznać więcej informacji.
|
||
W innym przypadku powinieneś czytać poniższe sekcje, ponieważ w nich jest
|
||
wyjaśnione co możesz zrobić i czego nie musisz zrobić w preambule LyX-owego
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Preambuła LaTeX-a znajduje się na samym początku dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
przed
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jego treścią.
|
||
Służy ona do:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji klasy dokumentu.
|
||
LyX już wykonuje to za Ciebie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli jesteś LaTeX-nikiem i masz już trochę dopasowanych klas dokumentów,
|
||
których chcesz używać, to zajrzyj do podręcznika
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Konfiguracja
|
||
\emph default
|
||
aby dowiedzieć się jak wykonać do nich interfejs.
|
||
Nie zapomnij wysłać swoich osiągnięć do LyX Team-u aby je włączyć do przyszłych
|
||
wersji!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji używanych pakietów.
|
||
Pakiety LaTeX-a dostarczają specjalne polecenia, które są dostępne w dokumencie
|
||
tylko jeśli zadeklarujemy pakiet w preambule.
|
||
Na przykład, pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
indentfirst
|
||
\family default
|
||
wymusza wcinanie wszystkich akapitów.
|
||
istnieją pakiety dla etykiet, kopert, marginesów itd.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
ustawiania liczników, zmiennych, długości i szerokości.
|
||
Istnieje kilka liczników LaTeX-a i zmiennych, które
|
||
\emph on
|
||
muszą
|
||
\emph default
|
||
być ustawione globalnie z poziomu preambuły, aby uzyskać żądany efekt [istnieją
|
||
inne zmienne, które można ustawiać także wewnątrz dokumentu].
|
||
Marginesy są dobrym przykładem czegoś co musi być ustawione w preambule.
|
||
Innym przykładem jest format nalepek na listy.
|
||
Możesz ustawić je gdziekolwiek, ale najlepszym miejscem do tego jest preambuła.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji definiowanych przez użytkownika poleceń [za pomocą polecenia
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newcommand
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\family default
|
||
], głównie skrótów dla poleceń LaTeX-a, które występują często w tekście
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
Mimo to preambuła jest dobrym miejscem na deklaracje poleceń, które
|
||
\emph on
|
||
mogą
|
||
\emph default
|
||
być deklarowane gdziekolwiek indziej [byleby
|
||
\emph on
|
||
przed
|
||
\emph default
|
||
ich pierwszym użyciem w tekście].
|
||
To może być użyteczne jeśli mamy wiele kodu LaTeX-a w dokumencie, który
|
||
normalnie nie powinien się zdarzyć.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dodaje do preambuły własne definicje podczas tworzenia pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To czyni dokumenty LaTeX-a utworzone przez LyX-a przenośnymi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zmiana preambuły
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia, które dodaje LyX do preambuły są zafiksowane i nie możesz ich
|
||
zmienić bez samodzielnego patchowania LyX-a.
|
||
Możesz jednak dodać własne rzeczy do preambuły.
|
||
Możesz to zrobić na dwa sposoby:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
reambuła
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ormatowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Otworzy się wówczas okno, w którym możesz wpisać swoje polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Edytor preambuły jest prymitywny, nie spodziewaj się po nim zbyt wiele.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Utwórz w swoim domyślnym szablonie dokumentu odpowiednie wpisy w preambule.
|
||
Wówczas tworząc nowy dokument na jego podstawie preambuła będzie już wpisana.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX nie dodaje niczego do Twojej części preambuły.
|
||
Zanim dodasz deklaracje do preambuły powinieneś upewnić się, że nie jest
|
||
już to wykonane przez LyX-a [czy pamiętasz co mówiliśmy o ponownym wynalezieniu
|
||
koła?].
|
||
Ponadto
|
||
\emph on
|
||
dokonuj poprawnych wpisów w preambule
|
||
\emph default
|
||
-- LyX nie sprawdza jej poprawności.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przykłady
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj znajduje się kilka przykładów co można dodać do preambuły:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #1: Przesunięcie strony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieją dwie zmienne LaTeX-a do sterowania pozycją strony:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ich nazwy są samoobjaśniające.
|
||
Te zmienne są użyteczne jeśli w tej chwili o etykietach.
|
||
Czasami rozmiar medium i obszar medium, na którym będziesz drukować nie
|
||
pokrywają się.
|
||
Wówczas mamy polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Domyślną wartością dla
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest 0 pt, czyli strona nie jest przesunięta.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Niestety, niektóre sterowniki DVI wydają się zawsze przesuwać stronę.
|
||
Nie mamy pomysłu dlaczego lub dlaczego Twój administrator nie poprawił
|
||
tego.
|
||
Jeśli używasz LyX-a w systemie, którego osobiście nie nadzorujesz, a którego
|
||
administrator to ,,doofus'', to polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
mogą zaoszczędzić Ci dni.
|
||
Na przykład Twoje marginesy lewy i górny są zawsze o pół cala zbyt duże.
|
||
Należy wówczas dodać do preambuły następujące polecenia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset}{-0.5 in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset}{-0.5 in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
a Twoje marginesy będą teraz poprawne.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #2: Etykiety
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mówiąc etykiety mamy na myśli wydruk etykiet z adresami.
|
||
Istnieje miły pakiet, dostępny w najbliższym Ci archiwum CTAN, do wydruku
|
||
etykiet o nazwie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
labels.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Twój system może nie mieć go domyślnie zainstalowanego -- zostawiamy Ci
|
||
to do sprawdzenia.
|
||
Pewnie będziesz chciał przeczytać dokumentację pakietu -- my nie zrobimy
|
||
tego za Ciebie.
|
||
Jednak poniższym przykładem podpowiadamy Ci jak z niego skorzystać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Po pierwsze wybierz klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
article
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Następnie wpisz do preambuły następujące deklaracje:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{labels}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LabelCols=3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LabelRows=7
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LeftBorder=8mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
RightBorder=8mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
TopBorder=9mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
BottomBorder=2mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te ustawienia są odpowiednie dla arkusza etykiet Avery, nr #5360.
|
||
Teraz jesteś gotów do wydruku etykiet, ale potrzeba jeszcze wstawić polecenia
|
||
LaTeX umieszczając polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{labels}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{labels}
|
||
\family default
|
||
wokół każdego tekstu z treścią etykiety.
|
||
Ta i inne funkcje pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
labels.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wyjaśnione w dokumentacji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Być może, że kiedyś, ktoś napisze plik układu LyX-a do obsługi tego pakietu
|
||
wprost.
|
||
Być może to będziesz Ty.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #3: Wcięcie akapitu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Amerykanie są wyćwiczeni we wcinaniu pierwszego wiersza
|
||
\emph on
|
||
każdego
|
||
\emph default
|
||
akapitu.
|
||
Tak jak wszystkie inne dziwne quirks, większość Amerykanów będzie wyć i
|
||
jęczeć dopóki nie będą mieli wcinanych pierwszych wierszy we wszystkich
|
||
akapitach
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga od
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Johna Weiss'a
|
||
\noun default
|
||
: To było napisane przez Amerykanina -- przeze
|
||
\emph on
|
||
mnie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
! Tak postrzegam moich rodaków.
|
||
Nieprzerwanie ja nie lubię tego.
|
||
Thpbpbpbpbpbpbpbp!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Polacy również.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście takie zachowanie nie jest standardem w typografii.
|
||
W książkach wcinana jest tylko pierwszy wiersz akapitu jeśli ten akapit
|
||
występuje po poprzednim akapicie.
|
||
Ideą wcinania pierwszego wiersza akapitu jest wyróżnienie sąsiadujących
|
||
akapitów.
|
||
Jeśli jednak nie ma poprzedniego akapitu, np.
|
||
pod rysunkiem lub na początku rozdziału czy sekcji, pierwszy akapit nie
|
||
będzie wyróżniony wcięciem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli jesteś amerykaninem, to nie przejmuj się takimi ezoterycznymi rzeczami,
|
||
po prostu chcesz mieć wcięcia! Dodaj to do preambuły
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwart
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwbk
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwrep
|
||
\family default
|
||
autorstwa
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Marcina Wolińskiego
|
||
\noun default
|
||
automatycznie wcinają wszystkie akapity.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{indentfirst}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli Twoja dystrybucja TeX-a nie jest podła, to będziesz miał ten pakiet
|
||
zainstalowany i wszystkie akapity będą wcinane tak jak na to zasługują.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #4: Ten dokument
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz także sprawdzić jaką preambułę posiada ten dokument, aby poznać jakie
|
||
zaawansowane rzeczy możesz zrobić.
|
||
Ponadto więcej przykładów co można wpisać do preambuły znajdziesz w tym
|
||
podręczniku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Błędy LyX-a i LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy LyX wywołuje LaTeX-a, informuje go aby ignorował wszelkie błędy i przetwarza
|
||
ł dalej.
|
||
Można to wykorzystać do przejrzenia logu przebiegu LaTeX i wykonania post-morte
|
||
m czynności.
|
||
Jak wspomnieliśmy wcześniej, LyX tworzy dwa rodzaje plików
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jeden z nich jest używany do lokalizacji błędów w dokumencie.
|
||
Jeśli pojawi się błąd, to LyX umieści prostokąt ze słowem ,,Błąd'' w odpowiedni
|
||
m miejscu w dokumencie
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
LyX okazjonalnie nie odgadnie miejsca, w którym zdarzył się błąd.
|
||
To się zdarza zwykle przy tabelach, rysunkach, matematyce i preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Zostanie także wyświetlony komunikat informujący o fakcie wystąpienia błędów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz nawigować pomiędzy błędami za pomocą polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Błąd
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Możesz ,,otwierać'' znaczniki błędów i podejrzeć komunikaty LaTeX-a przez
|
||
kliknięcie na znaczniku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wiele osób lubi zobaczyć wprost cały log, który jest dostępny z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
odgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
omunikaty LaTeX-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Istniej kilka powszechnych komunikatów błędów i ostrzeżeń.
|
||
Wyjaśnimy je tutaj.
|
||
Powinieneś zajrzeć do dobrej książki o LaTeX-u dla zapoznania się z pełną
|
||
listą.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Warning:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Komunikat zaczynające się tymi słowy jest komunikatem diagnostycznym LaTeX-a.
|
||
Otrzymasz podobne ostrzeżenie gdy dodasz lub zmienisz odnośnik lub wpis
|
||
bibliografii, wówczas LaTeX komunikuje Ci, że powinien zostać uruchomiony
|
||
jeszcze raz.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostrzeżenie można w większości zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Font Warning:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Inny komunikat ostrzegawczy, tym razem o fontach, których LaTeX nie potrafił
|
||
znaleźć.
|
||
Reszta komunikatu często informuje jakich fontów użył LaTeX w zastępstwie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz go bezpiecznie zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Overfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX absolutnie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
uwielbia
|
||
\emph default
|
||
dawać takie komunikaty.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia dotyczą wierszy, które są zbyt długie i wystają poza prawy
|
||
margines.
|
||
Prawie zawsze jest to niezauważalne na wydruku.
|
||
Albo jeden lub dwa znaki przekraczają prawy margines.
|
||
LaTeX zdaje się generować co najmniej jeden taki komunikat dla dowolnego
|
||
dokumentu jaki napiszesz.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz ignorować te głupie komunikaty.
|
||
Zobaczysz na własne oczy jeśli coś będzie zbyt szerokie, spójrz na wynik
|
||
przetwarzania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Underfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX komunikuje nam, że zbyt małe wypełnienie wiersza zmusza go do wstawienia
|
||
zbyt dużych odstępów między wyrazami.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz go także zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Overfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
vbox
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Underfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
vbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostrzeżenie o kłopotach z łamaniem stron -- zbyt małych lub zbyt dużych
|
||
odstępach pionowych.
|
||
Jeszcze raz spójrz na wynik przetwarzania.
|
||
Zobaczysz na własne oczy jeśli coś będzie zbyt szerokie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Error: File
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes els
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Xxxx
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes ers
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
not found
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Plik ,,Xxxx'' nie jest zainstalowany w systemie.
|
||
Ten komunikat pojawia się często, gdy nie zainstalowałeś pakietów użytych
|
||
w dokumencie.
|
||
Jeśli nie dotykałeś preambuły lub nie używałeś polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to znaczy że brakuje jednego z pakietów, które próbuje załadować LyX.
|
||
Użyj polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
omoc\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
onfiguracja LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby zobaczyć listę pakietów znanych LyX-owi.
|
||
Ten plik jest uaktualniany podczas każdej rekonfiguracji LyX-a (polecenie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja
|
||
\bar under
|
||
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
R
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ekonfiguruj
|
||
\family default
|
||
) i zawiera informacje, które pakiety zostały wykryte i do czego służą.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli
|
||
\emph on
|
||
użyłeś
|
||
\emph default
|
||
polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i pakiet nie został zainstalowany, to należy zainstalować go samodzielnie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Error: Unknown option
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Błąd pojawia się gdy podano niezdefiniowaną (lub błędną) opcję użytego pakietu.
|
||
Sprawdź dokumentację do pakietu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Undefined control sequence
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli wstawiłeś polecenie LaTeX w dokumencie, ale popełniłeś np.
|
||
błąd literowy, to otrzymasz taki właśnie komunikat błędu.
|
||
Być może zapomniałeś załadować jakiś pakiet.
|
||
W ogólnym przypadku, komunikat błędu zwykle oznacza, że użyłeś niezdefiniowaneg
|
||
o polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieją jeszcze inne komunikaty błędów i ostrzeżeń, a wiele z nich jest
|
||
samoobjaśniających.
|
||
Podane są częstymi komunikatami.
|
||
Inne są naprawdę zaszyfrowane.
|
||
To są aktualne komunikaty TeX-a i my na prawdę nie mamy klucza jak je odszyfrow
|
||
ać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oto ogólny tok postępowania jeśli zdarzy się błąd:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Sprawdź poprawność poleceń LaTeX-a wstawionych w dokumencie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli nie ma błędów literowych, to sprawdź poprawność ich użycia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli dostaniesz pęk znaczników błędów na samym początku dokumentu, to znaczy,
|
||
że jest jakiś błąd w preambule.
|
||
Zacznij debugować swoją preambułę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli nie dodałeś niczego do preambuły i nie wstawiłeś żadnych poleceń LaTeX-a
|
||
do dokumentu, to najpierw sprawdź swoją dystrybucję LaTeX.
|
||
Sprawdź brakujące pakiety i zainstaluj je.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
OK, nie brakuje pakietów.
|
||
Czy nie użyłeś jakieś opcji dopasowującej w LyX-ie? Precyzując, czy nie
|
||
użyłeś jej niewłaściwie, jak próba ręcznego wstawienia wielu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Protected Blank
|
||
\family default
|
||
s,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Linebreak
|
||
\family default
|
||
s czy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Pagebreak
|
||
\family default
|
||
s? Czy próbowałeś to kludge coś razem z nimi zamiast użyć odpowiednich środowisk
|
||
akapitów?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
OK, nie użyłeś żadnej opcji dopasowującej, postępujesz zgodnie z zasadami.
|
||
Czy próbowałeś przeprowadzić jakiś fantastyczny manewr? Czy zrobiłeś coś
|
||
wspaniałego w tabeli czy równaniu, jak wstawienie grafiki do komórki tabeli?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Czy nie masz zbyt długich akapitów tekstu gdzie LaTeX nie może znaleźć miejsca
|
||
na przełamanie wiersza? Domyślnie LaTeX jest dokładny w dodawaniu ekstra
|
||
odstępów między wyrazami aby przełamać wiersz.
|
||
Proponowane jest przerobienie akapitów aby usunąć ten problem.
|
||
Jeśli to nie jest możliwe, możesz objąć swój tekst w
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sloppypar
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby obniżyć wymagania LaTeX-a przy łamaniu wierszy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Czy nie przesadziłeś z zagnieżdżaniem? LyX [aktualnie] nie sprawdza czy
|
||
nie przekroczyłeś limitu zagnieżdżenia środowiska.
|
||
Jeśli zagnieździłeś środowiska aż do 17 poziomu, to może być problem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Nie otrzymałeś żadnych komunikatów błędów ale wynik źle wygląda.
|
||
Jeśli masz tabelę lub rysunek szerszy lub dłuższy od strony, to powinieneś:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
przeskalować rysunek do odpowiednich wymiarów,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
skrócić tabelę, tak aby pasowała.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli dalej jest źle z wynikiem i nie próbowałeś przeprowadzić żadnych wspaniały
|
||
ch lub kludge opcji dopasowujących, to my nie wiemy co jest nie tak.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli to nie pomoże, to
|
||
\emph on
|
||
prawdopodobnie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
znalazłeś błąd w LyX-ie\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Dodatkowe narzędzia składu dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Przygotowanie bibliografii za pomocą BibTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Ressler is to blame for all of Chapter 1 except where noted.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
STOP! jeśli wiesz czym jest BibTeX lub masz dobry pomysł na jego zastosowanie
|
||
(np.
|
||
ułożenie swojej własnej bazy bibliograficznej) nie idź, a biegnij do swojego
|
||
egzemplarza drugiego wydania Lamporta
|
||
\emph on
|
||
LaTeX: A Document Preparation System
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, zwłaszcza
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Dodatek B
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
W dalszej dyskusji zakładamy, że masz utworzony poprawny plik bibliografii
|
||
oraz masz poprawnie ustawione wszystkie odpowiednie zmienne środowiska
|
||
(np.
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
BIBINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
BSTINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
TEXINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
) oraz jeśli jesteś odpowiednio zdesperowany powinieneś utworzyć plik LaTeX-a
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z bazą BibTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dla tych, którzy nie znają BibTeX-a, jest to system do tworzenia wielkich
|
||
baz Twoich często używanych odnośników do literatury.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dla wszystkich przyszłych artykułów, zapisz tylko potrzebne pozycje literatury
|
||
do wstawienia do bazy i oznacz odpowiednim kluczem każdy odnośnik.
|
||
Nawet jeśli piszesz tylko kilka dokumentów z kilkoma odnośnikami w każdym,
|
||
to warto poświęcić Twój czas na sprawdzenie BibTeX-a i zdecydować czy będzie
|
||
użyteczny dla Ciebie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby używać BibTeX-a w LyX-ie należy najpierw zapoznać się
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznikiem Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, w którym opisano sposób wstawiania cytowań.
|
||
Podstawowy mechanizm wstawiania odnośników BibTeX-a jest taki sam.
|
||
Umieść kursor na końcu dokumentu i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pisy\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ytowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W otwartym oknie dialogowym wypełnij dwa pola:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Baza
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Danych podaj nazwę pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale BEZ rozszerzenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dla wyszukiwania w wielu plikach
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
należy podać ich nazwy rozdzielając je przecinkiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Styl podaj nazwę pliku stylu BibTeX-a BEZ rozszerzenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bst
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Domyślnym stylem jest
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dostępne są również style zgodne z polskimi zwyczajami typograficznymi o
|
||
nazwach:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plabbrv
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plalpha
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plplain
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plunsrt
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
(który powinien być dołączony do Twojej dystrybucji LaTeX-a, tak że nie
|
||
musisz przejmować się utworzeniem go).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zakładamy, że dla każdego cytowania źródło znajduje się w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
, wywołujemy polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ytowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w odpowiednim miejscu w tekście i wybierz z listy właściwy klucz odnośnika.
|
||
Nie potrzeba nic więcej; gdy wywołujemy na przykład polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
odgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
VI
|
||
\family default
|
||
, powinieneś zobaczyć że BibTeX i LaTeX są wywoływane gdy zachodzi potrzeba,
|
||
włączając wielokrotne wywołanie LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Tworzenie indeksu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dobry indeks jest jedną z najtrudniejszych rzeczy do zrobienia w długim
|
||
dokumencie.
|
||
LyX pomaga wykonać rzeczy trochę prościej za pomocą interfejsu do programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dla dokumentów polskojęzycznych powinien być wywoływany program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plmindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
, który można znaleźć w dystrybucjach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstawianie indeksu i zaznaczanie słów do włączenia do indeksu odbywa się
|
||
taką samą drogą jak przygotowanie bibliografii opisanej w poprzedniej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najpierw przejdź na koniec swojego dokumentu i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pisy\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ndeks
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Następnie, dla każdego słowa, które chcesz dodać do indeksu, umieść kursor
|
||
na końcu tego słowa i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Wstaw poprzedzające słowo do indeksu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To spowoduje umieszczenie znacznika pokazującego słowo, które pojawi się
|
||
w indeksie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeżeli chcesz dokładnie podać co ma pojawić się w indeksie -- na przykład
|
||
potrzebujesz mieć słowo ,,kot'' w indeksie, które będzie odnosiło się do
|
||
słów w tekście ,,kot'' i ,,koty'' to po prostu wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wstaw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Słowo do indeksu
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wpisz słowo ,,kot'' w oknie dialogowym.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I to wszystko.
|
||
LyX automatycznie wywoła
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
i samodzielnie utworzy indeks.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Bądź ostrożny i nie wstawiaj spacji pomiędzy słowem a znacznikiem indeksu,
|
||
ponieważ może się zdarzyć utworzenie niewłaściwego numeru strony w indeksie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powinieneś zdawać sobie sprawę, że istnieją bardziej zaawansowane metody
|
||
użycia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
: spójrz w dokumentację dołączoną do Twojej dystrybucji LaTeX-a i znajdź
|
||
jak wykonać zagnieżdżone wpisy itp.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Dokumenty wieloczęściowe
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Podstawy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przy pracy z dużymi plikami zawierającymi wiele sekcji i rozdziałów, często
|
||
jest wygodniej podzielić dokument na kilka plików lub być może masz ---
|
||
perhaps you have something where a table may change from time to time,
|
||
but the preceding text does not.
|
||
W takim przypadku powinieneś na serio rozważyć użycie dokumentów wieloczęściowy
|
||
ch.
|
||
Na przykład prace naukowe często składają się z pięciu głównych części:
|
||
wprowadzenia, obserwacji, wyników, dyskusji i podsumowania.
|
||
Każda z tych części może być zapisana w oddzielnym pliku LyX-a, gdzie jeden
|
||
plik będzie dokumentem głównym zawierającym tytuł, autorów, streszczenie,
|
||
spis treści, itd.
|
||
oraz pięć dołączonych plików dokumentów składowych (podrzędnych).
|
||
Należy zwrócić uwagę, że każdy z plików podrzędnych włączanych do dokumentu
|
||
głównego stanowi niezależny dokument, który może być formatowany i drukowany
|
||
niezależnie.
|
||
Można dołączać również pliki LaTeX-a, ale pliki te nie mogą posiadać własnej
|
||
preambuły (wszystko przed
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i za
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
musi być usunięte) gdyż w przeciwnym wypadku LaTeX zgłosi błąd podczas
|
||
przetwarzania dokumentu głównego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX pozwala łatwo włączać pliki poleceniem z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
D
|
||
\bar under
|
||
o
|
||
\bar default
|
||
łącz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Po wybraniu polecenia otwiera się okno wyboru dokumentu.
|
||
Po wybraniu dokumentu do wstawienia/dołączenia, w bieżącej pozycji kursora
|
||
wstawiany jest mały prostokąt.
|
||
Kliknięcie na prostokącie wyświetla okno dialogowe dołączania dokumentu.
|
||
W tym oknie można wybrać plik do dołączenia i metodę dołączenia.
|
||
Wybór pliku powinien być już jasny.
|
||
W oknie mamy do wyboru trzy metody dołączania plików; ,,dołącz'', ,,wstaw''
|
||
i ,,maszynopis''.
|
||
Różnica pomiędzy ,,dołącz'' a ,,wstaw'' jest w pełni jasna tylko dla LaTeX-pert
|
||
ów.
|
||
Praktycznie różnica polega na tym, że pliki ,,dołączane'' zaczynają się
|
||
od nowej strony, a pliki ,,wstawiane'' od miejsca wstawienia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Generalnie, plik główny jest konwertowany do formatu LaTeX przed składaniem,
|
||
podczas gdy dołączane pliki są konwertowane do formatu LaTeX, który nie
|
||
zawiera preambuły.
|
||
Zaznaczenie pola Nie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
formatuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
zabezpiecza przed konwersją.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dołączanie plików metodą ,,maszynopis'' pozwala na dołączanie ,,dosłowne''
|
||
plików w środowisku verbatim z czcionką o stałej szerokości.
|
||
Normalnie spacje w pliku są niewidzialne, dwie kolejne spacje są zachowywane,
|
||
inaczej niż standardowo w LyX-ie.
|
||
Przycisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Zachowaj spacje
|
||
\family default
|
||
pozwala na zachowanie spacji lub przywraca standardową interpretację spacji
|
||
wielokrotnych.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Odnośniki pomiędzy plikami
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest możliwe ustawienie odnośników pomiędzy różnymi plikami.
|
||
Najpierw otwórz wszystkie pliki pomiędzy którymi chcesz wykonać odnośniki,
|
||
na przykład dwa pliki A i B, gdzie plik B jest dołączony do pliku A.
|
||
Wstawiliśmy etykietę w pliku A i chcemy odnośnik do niej w pliku B.
|
||
Będąc w dokumencie A z menu wybieramy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw \SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dnośnik wewnętrzny
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Teraz przełączamy się na dokument B bez zamykania okna odnośnika.
|
||
Wstawiamy odnośnik i już!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy przeglądasz plik A wszystko jest poprawnie dołączone i etykietowane.
|
||
Jeśli zamkniesz okno odnośnika i ponownie otworzysz je w dokumencie B to
|
||
zobaczysz tylko etykiety pliku B.
|
||
Ta procedura może nie jest intuicyjna (czasami zdarza się błąd) ale działa.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Algorytmy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
(z konfiguracji LaTeX)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
algorithm
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest potrzebny do wydania ,,wstawek algorytmów''.
|
||
Jest on użyteczny przy umieszczaniu krótkich algorytmów w miejscu złamania
|
||
strony i obsługuje także spis algorytmów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Podrysunek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
(z konfiguracji LaTeX)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
subfigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest używany w LyX-ie podczas wyboru ,,Podrysunek'' w oknie Rysunek.
|
||
Kilka rysunków zaznaczonych w ten sposób może być upakowanych w jednej
|
||
wstawce w indywidualnymi podpisami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Ozdobne nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Właściwie powinnyśmy używać nazw:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
pagina górna
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
pagina dolna
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Domyślny układ strony jest raczej nieskomplikowany -- plain; dla klasy artykuł
|
||
numery stron są wycentrowane u dołu strony.
|
||
Ten dokument jest klasy książka (book) i jest trochę bardziej ozdobny,
|
||
ale aby rzeczywiście postawić na wygląd potrzebujesz użyć stylu ,,fancy''
|
||
co wspomniano w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Ta sekcja opisuje polecenia LaTeX-a, które trzeba wstawić w preambule lub
|
||
w tekście aby otrzymać żądany efekt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nagłówek i stopka strony są podzielone na trzy pola określające lewą, środkową
|
||
i prawą ich część.
|
||
Poleceniami LaTeX-a do ustawiania tych pól w najprostszy sposób są
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lfoot
|
||
\family default
|
||
itd.
|
||
przypuśćmy, że chcesz wstawić swoje nazwisko w lewym górnym narożniku każdej
|
||
strony.
|
||
Po prostu wstaw następujące polecenie w preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{John Q.
|
||
DocWriter}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zobaczysz w podglądzie swoje nazwisko w lewym górnym narożniku każdej strony.
|
||
Jeśli pole ma domyślną wartość, której chcesz się pozbyć (często numer
|
||
strony pojawia się w centralnej części stopki) to po prostu wstaw polecenie
|
||
z pustym argumentem, jak w przykładzie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cfoot{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zróbmy rzeczywiście ozdobną stronę: wstawmy w nagłówku po lewej nazwę sekcji
|
||
wraz ze słowem ,,Sekcja'' (np.
|
||
Sekcja 3) oraz numer strony po prawej (np.
|
||
Strona 4), natomiast w stopce po lewej swoje nazwisko i datę po prawej.
|
||
Do tego będą nam potrzebne następujące polecenia w preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{Sekcja
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thesection}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chead{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rhead{Strona
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lfoot{John Q.
|
||
DocWriter}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cfoot{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rfoot{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thesection
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage
|
||
\family default
|
||
dają dostęp do liczników sekcji i stron LaTeX-a, i będą wydrukowane w bieżącej
|
||
sekcji i numerze strony.
|
||
Polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today
|
||
\family default
|
||
wydrukuje bieżącą datę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Cienką linię oddzielającą nagłówek i stopkę od treści strony możemy także
|
||
zmodyfikować.
|
||
Jeśli nie chcesz linii w nagłówku to ustal jej grubość na 0.
|
||
Domyślną grubością linii nagłówkowej jest 0.4pt, dla linii stopki zaś jest
|
||
0pt.
|
||
Możesz użyć polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
|
||
\family default
|
||
do ustawiania ich grubości.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przełączać i wyłączać ustawienia nagłówków/stopek za pomocą poleceń:
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{empty}
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{plain}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{fancy}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Po prostu wstaw je w tekście na stronie, którą chcesz zmienić i zaznacz
|
||
je jako kod TeX-a.
|
||
Strony tytułowe są oznaczone domyślnie jako plain, podczas gdy kolejne
|
||
strony są w stylu fancy gdy używasz globalnego ustawienia fancy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieje wiele złożonych poleceń, które będą wstawiały rzeczy w lewym górnym
|
||
narożniku na stronach nieparzystych itd.
|
||
ale po szczegóły odsyłamy Cię do dokumentacji pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
fancyhdr
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na przykład jeśli masz instalację teTeX-a zobacz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/share/texmf/doc/latex/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Końcowym przykładem jest możliwość wstawienia pliku Encapsulated PostScript
|
||
do nagłówka lub stopki.
|
||
Pewnie będziesz chciał wstawić logo firmy do lewego dolnego narożnika strony.
|
||
Spróbuj wstawić następujące polecenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
resizebox{1in}{!}{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
(będzie potrzebne w preambule polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Ministrony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX dostarcza mechanizmu do tworzenia strony wewnątrz strony, zwanych
|
||
ministronami (minipages).
|
||
Wewnątrz ministrony są dostępne wszystkie zwykłe reguły wcinania, łamania
|
||
wierszy itd.
|
||
LyX także dostarcza tę możliwość.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ministrony posiadają własną wstawkę, aby wstawić ministronę wybierz polecenie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw \SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
M
|
||
\bar default
|
||
inistrony
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Klikając prawym klawiszem myszy na wstawkę otwiera się okienko, w którym
|
||
można ustalić wyrównianie i szerokość ministrony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga.
|
||
Jeśli ministrona jest zbyt długa aby zmieścić się na stronie, to zostanie
|
||
skrócona, a nie wcięta na następnej stronie (nie pojawi się reszta na następnej
|
||
stronie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Są dwie dalsze opcje ministron.
|
||
Jeśli umieścisz dwie ministrony obok siebie, to można wstawić
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
Z
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nak specjalny\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
HFill
|
||
\family default
|
||
do maksymalnego rozsunięcia ich, który wymuszi początek pierwszej ministrony
|
||
od lewego marginesu a koniec następnej na prawym marginesie.
|
||
Sprawdź tą opcję dla drugiej ministrony, nie dla pierwszej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest ministrona, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie ministrony, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest druga ministrona, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie drugiej ministrony, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To jest zwykły tekst, który rozdziela dwa przykłady
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest ministrona, która używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie ministrony, która używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest druga ministrona, która używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie drugiej ministrony, która używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Oblewanie rysunku tekstem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Wrap figure
|
||
lines 0
|
||
placement r
|
||
overhang 0col%
|
||
width "6cm"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Graphics
|
||
filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
|
||
width 40col%
|
||
rotateOrigin center
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Caption
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Ten rysunek jest oblany tekstem, a to jest śliczny podpis
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Często zadawanym pytaniem jest pytanie o możliwość ,,oblewania'' rysunków
|
||
tekstem w ten sposób, że rysunek zajmuje część kolumny a reszta jest wypełniona
|
||
tekstem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Obok znajduje się rysunek pętli Moebiusa -- powinieneś go już zobaczyć w
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby oblać tekstem rysunek jak ten, nalezy wybrac z menu polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
stawki\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Rysunek oblany
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: ten pakiet jest bardzo kruchy
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Kruchy w sensie LaTeX-a.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Dla przykładu, mając rysunek zbyt blisko końca strony będzie zamieszanie
|
||
treści powyżej, gdy będziemy mieć dwa rysunki blisko siebie.
|
||
Używaj tego pakietu oszczędnie i czytaj dokumentację zawartą w pakiecie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Miejmy nadzieję, że w przyszłości LyX będzie obsługiwał te funkcje natywnie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Opcje tabel
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Standardowy układ tabel będzie odpowiedni w 99% wszystkich Twoich tabel,
|
||
ale w 1% prawdopodobnie będziesz potrzebował tabel specjalnie dostosowanych
|
||
do swoich wymagań.
|
||
Polecenie z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
abela
|
||
\family default
|
||
otwiera okno formatowania tabeli.
|
||
W zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumna
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wiersz
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się dostęp do kilku poleceń wyrównywania kolumn.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Teraz krótkie wspomnienie o LaTeX-u: gdy ustawiamy tabelę w LaTeX-u to dla
|
||
każdej kolumny deklarujemy typ wyrównania.
|
||
Dla przykładu możesz podać ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l
|
||
\family default
|
||
'',,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
c
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' lub ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
r
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' dla justowania do lewej, wyśrodkowania i wyrównania kolumny do prawej
|
||
(co w LyX-ie objawia się trzema przyciskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
W lewo
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Center
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
W prawo
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Czwartym typem jest ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
p
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', który deklaruje szerokość kolumny (w LyX-ie mamy pole
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Szerokość
|
||
\family default
|
||
) co powoduje automatyczne łamanie wierszy.
|
||
Piątym typem jest ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (vertical bar), który raczej służy do tworzenia pionowych kresek ramek
|
||
(w LyX-ie mamy do tego przyciski w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ramka
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Kończąc, istnieje typ ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', który pozwala użyć cokolwiek jako separatora kolumn co jest zamknięte
|
||
w towarzyszących nawiasach włączając argument pusty.
|
||
Powody robienia tego mogą nie być jasne, ale cechy te mogą być bardzo użyteczne.
|
||
Najlepiej to pokazać na przykładach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Usuwanie dodatkowej przestrzeni tabeli
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj znajduje się standardowa tabela:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zwróć uwagę, że poziome kreski wystają troszkę z obu strona poza tekst.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz aby linie zaczynały i kończyły się równo z tekstem, to można
|
||
wstawić pusty separator na końcu aby zwolnić trochę miejsca dodawanego
|
||
domyślnie przez LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{} l">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="l @{}">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tym przypadku w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumnie specjalnej
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla lewej kolumny wpisano ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@{} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', natomiast dla prawej wpisano ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l @{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', co wstawia puste znaki na końcach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zmiana znaku separatora kolumn
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Teraz proponujemy zastosowanie
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
z odrobiną miejsca obok jako separatora kolumn tabeli.
|
||
Po prostu wyłącz pionowe ramki i wpisz w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w obszarze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumna specjalna ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l@{~$
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sqrt{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pi}$~} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
Oto wynik:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{~$\sqrt{\pi}$~}l">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wyrównanie kolumny według cyfr znaczących
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Proponujemy wyrównanie kolumny według cyfr znaczących.
|
||
Standardowym trickiem LaTeX-a jest podzielenie liczby na dwie kolumny;
|
||
w lewej -- przeznaczonej dla części całkowitej -- wyrównujemy do prawej
|
||
strony, a w prawej -- przeznaczonej dla części ułamkowej -- wyrównujemy
|
||
do lewej, natomiast separator kolumn ustawiamy jako pusty.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
|
||
<features tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{} l">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wyrażenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wartość
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="right" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
3.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
1416
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi^{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
36.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
462
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(\pi^{\pi})^{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
80663.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi^{\pi^{\pi}}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
1.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
3402
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times10^{18}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mimo że będzie to wyglądało trochę śmiesznie w LyX-ie, to na wydruku pojawią
|
||
się dwukolumnowa tabela, w której prawa kolumna jest wyrównana według cyfr
|
||
znaczących, a nagłówek jest wyśrodkowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Myślę, że najlepiej będzie jak opiszę jak to zrobiłem: Najpierw utworzyłem
|
||
tabelę 3 x 3 i usunąłem wszystkie ramki.
|
||
Następnie dodałem ramki pod nagłówkiem i rozdzielającą pierwszą i drugą
|
||
kolumnę.
|
||
Pierwsza kolumna jest wyśrodkowana.
|
||
W drugiej kolumnie wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
3.
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
36.
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
80663.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
1.
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i wyrównałem tę kolumnę do prawej.
|
||
W trzeciej kolumnie wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
1416
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
462
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
3402
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times10^{18}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
oraz ustawiłem wyrównanie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@{} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na końcu wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Wartość
|
||
\family default
|
||
w środkowej kolumnie, podświetliłem je, wyrównałem do prawej.
|
||
Czyż nie łatwe?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Lepsze rozwiązanie wyrównania według cyfr znaczących
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Alternatywnym rozwiązaniem wyrównania według cyfr znaczących w tabelach
|
||
jest użycie pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dodaj następujący tekst do preambuły LaTeX-a:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{dcolumn}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{.}{#1}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby mieć kolumny wyrównane według cyfr znaczących wpisz w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie formatu tabeli w zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumny/Wiersze
|
||
\family default
|
||
następujący tekst:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
d{liczba miejsc dziesiętnych danych}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\family roman
|
||
\emph on
|
||
[Przykładową tabelę usunięto.
|
||
Zobacz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph default
|
||
decimal.lyx
|
||
\family roman
|
||
\emph on
|
||
w katalogu examples.]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Do utworzenia dodatkowego miejsca zwiększ liczbę miejsc dziesiętnych w
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
d{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ustaw atrybut
|
||
\family sans
|
||
multicolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla pojedynczej komórki niewrażliwy na wyrównanie względem cyfr znaczących.
|
||
Wadą tej metody jest to, że tryb matematyczny nie jest dopuszczalny w kolumnie
|
||
z wyrównaniem względem cyfr znaczących z wyjątkiem jeśli atrybut multicolumn
|
||
jest włączony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ta metoda oferuje taką samą elastyczność jak pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Możemy, na przykład zmienić separator wyrównania i mamy różne znaki separatorów
|
||
dla różnych kolumn przez definicję typów wielokrotnych kolumn w preambule.
|
||
Składnia jest następująca:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
D{separator_wej}{separator_wyj}{liczba_miejsc_dzieś}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zainteresowanym czytelnikom polecamy dokumentację do pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wybór znaku wyliczenia
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:bullet"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dostarcza 216 znaków dostępnych wprost z menu.
|
||
Użycie tego menu daje Ci możliwość łatwego wyboru odpowiedniego znaku dla
|
||
każdego poziomu zagnieżdżenia wyliczeń.
|
||
Te ustawienia są globalne dla całego dokumentu i nie można ustawić różnych
|
||
znaków w różnych akapitach
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Można tego dokonać tylko ręcznie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak je zobaczyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otwórz z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wybierz zakładkę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
yróżnienia.
|
||
\family default
|
||
W zakładce wyświetlona jest tabela znaków wyliczenia.
|
||
Za pomocą przycisków umieszczonych po lewej stronie okna mamy dostęp do
|
||
sześciu zestawów znaków.
|
||
Przyciski umieszczone w górnej części okna przeznaczone są do wyboru głębokości
|
||
zagnieżdżenia wyliczenia.
|
||
Tekst pod tabelą zestawu znaków wyświetla nazwę LaTeX-a aktualnie wybranego
|
||
znaku.
|
||
Można również w tym miejscu podać własne definicje znaku wyliczenia.
|
||
Jeśli zmodyfikujesz domyślne ustawienia to będziesz potrzebował podać potrzebne
|
||
pakiety w preambule.
|
||
Znaki podzielone są na sześć zestawów ze względu na wymagane pakiety.
|
||
Poniższa tabela przedstawia przypisanie zestawów do pakietów LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
|
||
<features tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przycisk
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wymagany pakiet
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
base LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Maths
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
amssymb.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding4
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX nie zatrzyma Cię przed użyciem znaku z pakietu którego nie masz.
|
||
Jeśli otrzymasz komunikat błędu LaTeX-a podczas próby podglądu lub wydruku
|
||
będzie on oznaczał brak wymaganego pakietu.
|
||
LyX nie będzie ograniczał użycia przy lokalnej edycji i eksporcie gdziekolwiek.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak użyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wybierz przycisk głębokości wyliczenia i następnie wybierz znak i wielkość.
|
||
Zmiana nie będzie widoczna w LyX-ie, ale będzie widoczna w podglądzie dokumentu
|
||
przy użyciu xdvi lub ghostview.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przywrócić domyślny znak wyliczenia przez kliknięcie prawym klawiszem
|
||
myszy na przycisku poziomu wyliczenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli rzeczywiście chcesz mieć wiele układów akapitów z różnymi zestawami
|
||
znaków wyliczenia w każdym musisz wykonać trochę brudnej roboty.
|
||
Okno wyboru znaku wyliczenia może pomóc w znalezieniu nazwy LaTeX-owej
|
||
znaku.
|
||
Aby zrobić własne akapity musisz mieś następującą opcję:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi=
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
small
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sharp
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Użyj polecenia LaTeX-a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{}{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
do specyfikacji nowego znaku wyliczenia dla zadanej głębokości zagnieżdżenia.
|
||
To będzie także potrzebne do zapisu bieżącego znaku i jego późniejszego
|
||
ponownego przywołania.
|
||
W tym wyliczeniu zostały użyte następujące kody LaTeX-a do zmiany znaku
|
||
wyliczenia w pierwszym poziomie.
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi=
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
small
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sharp
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Uwaga głębokość zagnieżdżenia w poleceniu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitem
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest podawana cyframi rzymskimi (podobnie jak numeracja części).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
[
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
star
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Podaj dla każdego indywidualnego wiersza wyliczenia kod znaku zamknięty
|
||
w nawiasy prostokątne i wpisane w trybie TeX.
|
||
Na przykład ten wiersz zaczyna się znakiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
[
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
star
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)]
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Poczekaj na LyX 1.2.
|
||
Następne stabilne wydanie LyX-a powinna mieć wbudowaną obsługę definiowania
|
||
dla każdego wyliczenia oddzielnego zestawu znaków.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli będziesz potrzebował przywrócić z powrotem poprzednie globalne ustawienia
|
||
znaków to należy wpisać:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Specjalne klasy dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AMS Math
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by David
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Johnson
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Układ AMS-Math jest zestawem styli zalecanymi dla składu pism matematycznych
|
||
przesyłanych do wydawnictwa American Mathematical Society.
|
||
Układ nie jest przycięty do specyfiki pisma, ale można to łatwo zrobić.
|
||
Powinieneś przejrzeć dokumentację AMS pod kątem specyficznych instrukcji
|
||
dla każdego pisma (często wymagana jest tylko zmiana w jednym wierszu).
|
||
Dokumentacja AMS jest dostępna w internecie na stronie
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.ams.org
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
lub przez ftp
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amslatex/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Te układy są odpowiednie i użyteczne dla zapisu matematyki.
|
||
Są aktualnie dostępne różne układy AMS-math:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsart -- standardowy format artykułu -- AMS article.
|
||
Wszystkie równania i wyrażenia są numerowane jako
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(n.m)$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdzie pierwsza liczba oznacza sekcję, a druga odpowiada kolejnemu numerowi
|
||
środowiska (Theorems, Corollaries, Propositions, Definitions, Remarks,
|
||
itd.) w tej sekcji.
|
||
Istnieje także kilka (ale nie wszystkie) środowisk nienumerowanych, które
|
||
są używane okazjonalnie.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsart-seq -- tutaj, twierdzenia, definicje itd.
|
||
są numerowane kolejno, bez odniesienia do numeru sekcji.
|
||
Dostępne są również nienumerowane środowiska (ale nie wszystkie), do okazjonaln
|
||
ego użycia.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsbook - standardowy format książki -- AMS book (prawdziwe monografie).
|
||
Numeracja jest podobna jak w układzie amsart, z wyjątkiem numeracji wszystkiego
|
||
jako
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(n,m,p)$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdzie pierwszy numer odnosi się do numeru rozdziału, drugi do sekcji,
|
||
a trzeci jest numerem kolejnym wyrażenia (Theorems, Corollaries, Propositions,
|
||
Definitions, Remarks, itd.) w tej sekcji.
|
||
Istnieje także kilka (ale nie wszystkie) środowisk nienumerowanych, które
|
||
są używane okazjonalnie.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dowolne pliki LyX-a ams-* mogą być konwertowane do schematu przez prostą
|
||
zmianę klasy dokumentu w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Co daje ten szablon?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te układy dostarczają długą listę środowisk.
|
||
Najbardziej matematyczne pisma i książki będą korzystać w większości z
|
||
tych środowisk, AMS-LaTeX-u sprzyja definiowaniu nieograniczonej liczby
|
||
rozmaitych takich deklaracji.
|
||
Jednak zalecane przez AMS środowiska są dostępne w LyX-ie.
|
||
Oto lista nowych środowisk (nie wyliczamy typowych takich jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
sections, bibliography, title, author, date
|
||
\family default
|
||
):
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Theorem This is typically used for the statements of major results.
|
||
Słowo
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,Theorem
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' wyświetlane jest czcionką półgrubą, along with an automatically-determined
|
||
number (an unnumbered version,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, is also available).
|
||
Tekst jest pochylony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Corollary This is used for statements which follow fairly directly from
|
||
previous statements.
|
||
Again, these can be major results.
|
||
Unnumbered version
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary*
|
||
\family default
|
||
is available.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Lemma These are smaller results needed to prove other statements.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Proposition These are less major results which (hopefully) add to the general
|
||
theory being discussed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Conjecture These are statements provided without justification, which the
|
||
author does not know how to prove, but which seem to be true (to the author,
|
||
at least).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Criterion A required condition.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Algorithm A general procedure to be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Axiom This is a property or statement taken as true within the system being
|
||
discussed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Definition Guess what this is for.
|
||
The font, both on-screen and in the output, is different for this environment
|
||
than for the previous ones.
|
||
The heading (,,definition'') is still set in boldface, along with the number,
|
||
if any, but the rest is set upright.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Example Skład jest podobny do Definition.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Condition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Problem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Exercise
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Remark This environment is also a new type of theorem.
|
||
This is set with the word Remark in italics, and the rest upright.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Note Set similarly to the Remark environment.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Notation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Claim
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Summary
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Acknowledgement
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Case Generally, these are used to break up long arguments, using specific
|
||
instances of some condition.
|
||
The numbering scheme for cases is on its own, not together with other numbered
|
||
statements.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Conclusion
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Fact
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Proof Słowo ,,
|
||
\shape italic
|
||
Proof
|
||
\shape default
|
||
'' jest pisane kursywą, but the rest is set upright.
|
||
At the end of this environment (other environments can be nested within
|
||
this one, of course) a QED symbol (usually a square, but it can vary with
|
||
different styles) is placed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Address Tu powinien być podany stały adres autora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Current
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Address Tu powinien być podany czasowy adres autora, gdy wysyłał dokument,
|
||
o ile jest różny od podanego powyżej w Address.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Email Adres e-mail autora
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
URL Adres strony internetowej autora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Keywords Słowa kluczowe i frazy używane do identyfikacji specyficznych dyskutowa
|
||
nych tematów w prasie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Subjectclass These refer to the AMS Subject Classifications, published and
|
||
described in
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Mathematical Reviews
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
These are also available online at the AMS cites listed above.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Dedicatory
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Translator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ponadto, środowiska automatycznie włączają pakiety AMS-LaTeX i czcionki
|
||
AMS, które muszą być dostępne w Twoim systemie, aby można było używać tych
|
||
układów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Dinbrief
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
dinbrief
|
||
\family default
|
||
może być użyta do pisania listów zgodnie z niemiecką konwencją.
|
||
Dla Ciebie w folderze
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.../lyx/share/templates
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się plik przykładowy, aby było łatwiej zacząć.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest alternatywą dla standardowej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
article
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Daje ona podobną funkcjonalność, ale można preferować w tym układzie bezszeryfo
|
||
we tytularia i jeszcze więcej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
A&A Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Peter
|
||
\noun default
|
||
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sütterlin
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano jak można użyć LyX-a do pisania artykułów do pism naukowych
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astronomy and Astrophysics
|
||
\emph default
|
||
oraz
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Supplement Series
|
||
\emph default
|
||
przy użyciu klasy dokumentu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aa.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
z pakietu makr wydawnictwa Springer.
|
||
Ten pakiet może być ściągnięty z serwera ftp Springera
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.springer.de/pub/tex/latex/aa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Instrukcja do A&A Paper jest dostarczana razem z pakietem.
|
||
Ten tekst nie ma na celu zastąpienia oryginalnej instrukcji ale jest krótkim
|
||
przewodnikiem jak wykorzystać ten format.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby zacząć nowy dokument wybieramy z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
owy
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
s
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zablonu
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Zalecamy korzystanie z szablonu.
|
||
Either create one yourself, or ask the local system administrator to suply
|
||
a site-wide version.
|
||
Przykładowy szablon jest częścią standardowej dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyłeś szablonu to zwróć uwagę na następujące ustawienia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wybierz klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper (A&A)
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tyl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
w zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dokument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tyl strony
|
||
\family default
|
||
: pozostaw
|
||
\family sans
|
||
domyślny
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Układ jest zrobiony za pomocą makr i nie powinieneś niczego zmieniać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Możesz chcieć użyć czcionki
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Times
|
||
\family default
|
||
wybierając z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zcionka
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jako sugerowanej przez wydawnictwo Springer dla jednolitego wyglądu tekstu
|
||
wydruków.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszą rzeczą do wprowadzenia jest dane nagłówkowe.
|
||
Które zawierają osiem wpisów, z których kilka jest opcjonalnych.
|
||
Oto one:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thesaurus
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane] Zobacz podręcznik Springera.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subtitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Offprints
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [opcjonalne] jeśli jest więcej niż jeden autor, to komu wysłać odbitki.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Email
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [opcjonalne] adres e-mail dla kontaktu z autorem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane].
|
||
Suggested format is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Received: <date> / Accepted <date>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nie potrzeba wydawać polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
maketitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jest to robione automatycznie przez LyX gdy nagłówek jest zakończony.
|
||
Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised
|
||
to keep the above sequence, just to get the best optics and meets the layout
|
||
of the real document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli chcesz umieścić przypis w nagłówku, np.
|
||
dla wskazania twojego aktualnego adresu, możesz użyć standardowego przypisu
|
||
za pomocą
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rzypis.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
LyX w takim przypadku użyje automatycznie określenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thanks{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In addition to these topics, Springer uses two additional LaTeX commands
|
||
that have no counterpart in LyX:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\family default
|
||
do oddzielenia różnych nazw takich jak autorzy, instytucje.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
inst{<nr>}
|
||
\family default
|
||
to mark corresponding author/institute pairs.
|
||
The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
field, so you have to put a marker to each author.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In both cases, the appropriate command has to be entered in LyX an marked
|
||
as LaTeX code.
|
||
See the examples.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Streszczenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Streszczenie powinno się znajdować bezpośrednio za nagłówkiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The only special thing about the abstract environment is that it should
|
||
contain an entry with the keywords.
|
||
This is not yet implemented for LyX, therefore you have to enter the LaTeX
|
||
command
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
by hand and mark it as LaTeX code.
|
||
Zobacz przykładowy artykuł.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Układ A&A paper obsługuje następujące środowiska dla strukturyzacji tekstu:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Acknowledgment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Bibliography
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Polecenia nie obsługiwane przez LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Kilka poleceń układu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper (A&A)
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest jeszcze obsługiwane w LyX-ie.
|
||
Kilka zostało już omówionych.
|
||
Dla kompletności poniżej są one wszystkie wypisane:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
appendix
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authorrunning
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
inst{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
object{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
titlerunning{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli chcesz użyć któregoś z tych poleceń, to musisz wpisać je sam.
|
||
I nie zapomnij wpisywać je w trybie LaTeX-a!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wstawki -- rysunki i tabele
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX obsługuje niezbędne środowiska wstawek
|
||
\family sans
|
||
figure, figure*, table
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
table*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, dlatego nie wspominamy o nich tutaj więcej.
|
||
Zajrzyj do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Pamiętaj, że tabele powinny być wyrównane lewostronnie.
|
||
Do tego celu wybierz tabelę i zmień wyrównanie w
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
A
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kapit.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest tylko jedna specjalna rzecz: rysunki z podpisami.
|
||
Aby utworzyć takie rysunki musisz wykonać poniższe kroki:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Utwórz szeroką wstawkę:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
stawki\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
R
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ysunek(wide)
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wpisz treść podpisu rysunku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Naciśnij
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enter
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby przesunąć kursor powyżej podpisu,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wstaw swój rysunek (eps),
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Ustaw kursor za rysunkiem i wstaw odstęp poziomy:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
Z
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nak specjalny
|
||
\bar under
|
||
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
H
|
||
\bar default
|
||
Fill
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Przełącz się do trybu LaTeX:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
M-c
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
t
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wpisz:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{55mm}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\series bold
|
||
Nie zamykaj nawiasu!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Ustaw kursor za podpisem, przełącz się do trybu LaTeX-a i wstaw brakujący
|
||
nawias
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zobacz także rysunek w przykładowym artykule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Szablon referatu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
For submission, the paper has to be formated in a special double-spacing
|
||
layout.
|
||
For this purpose, you have to give the option
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
referee
|
||
\family default
|
||
to the documentclass.
|
||
This must be done using the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tra
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
field in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup.
|
||
Just enter the string
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
referee
|
||
\family default
|
||
there.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przykład
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W folderze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się plik przykładowy artykuł napisany w LyX-ie.
|
||
To jest przykład z oryginalnago pakietu makr Springera przetłumaczonego
|
||
do LyX-a.
|
||
Użyj go jako inspirację i porównanie oryginalnego kodu LaTeX-a z LyX-owym
|
||
sposobem pisania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AASTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
AASTeX jest zestawem makr wydanych przez American Astronomical Society dla
|
||
ułatwienia wysyłania elektronicznych manuskryptów do trzech pism wydawanych
|
||
przez Towarzystwo:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysical Journal
|
||
\emph default
|
||
(włączając Listy i Suplement),
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astronomical Journal
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Publications of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX wymaga co najmniej wersji 5.0 tych makr.
|
||
Wersje starsze od 5.0 są przeznaczone dla LaTeX2.09 i są niekompatybilne
|
||
z LyX-em.
|
||
Pakiet AASTeX można pobrać z serwera ftp AAS
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A complete user guide is contained in that package and you should familiarize
|
||
yourself with it thoroughly before embarking on writing a paper in LyX.
|
||
LyX will not reduce the need to figure out all the AASTeX commands, it
|
||
will only reduce the drudgery of typing everything in.
|
||
It is your responsibility to ensure that the final exported LaTeX document
|
||
conforms completely to the requirements of the journal to which you are
|
||
submitting your paper.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Starting a New Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I strongly suggest that you start with the AASTeX template file.
|
||
Click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
New from template
|
||
\family default
|
||
, enter the new file name, then choose the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aastex.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template.
|
||
This will show the most common fields found in a manuscript.
|
||
Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) with the correct information.
|
||
Many of the AASTeX commands and environments can be implemented directly
|
||
in LyX, but some cannot: most noticeably
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffilmark
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiltext
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which should stick out like a sore thumb if you actually just opened the
|
||
template file.
|
||
For commands such as these, the LaTeX code must be entered directly and
|
||
marked as such.
|
||
Such commands are referred to as ERT, or Evil Red Text.
|
||
I tried to minimize the amount of ERT needed in an AASTeX document, but
|
||
there is still more required than any of us would like.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Finishing Your Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When the paper is finished to your satisfaction and previews/prints correctly,
|
||
there are a few
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
postprocessing
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
actions which need to be done before you submit it to the journals.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Export your paper as a LaTeX file (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
as LateX
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Edit the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file with your favorite text editor
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove the comment lines before the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage...{fontenc}
|
||
\family default
|
||
line if it appears (usually just after
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
}; also remove the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
secnumdepth
|
||
\family default
|
||
line if it appears.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove everything between (and including) the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, except for any commands you specifically put into the LaTeX preamble
|
||
(which should appear immediately after the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
User specified LaTeX commands
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
comment in the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
search for any
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figcaption
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands and replace
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
FileName
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
with the correct, real file name.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
alter any
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, if necessary (see section
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "cite"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
below).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Run the resulting file through LaTeX to make sure it still processes correctly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Reread the journal requirements to make sure your filenames and formats
|
||
are correct.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Submit it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Comments On Specific Commands
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I will not describe the detailed usage of the individual AASTeX commands:
|
||
the AASTeX User Guide (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aasguide.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
) gives a good description of each.
|
||
Thus it's probably easiest for me to go down the list as found in the guide
|
||
and offer comments where necessary.
|
||
So let's begin \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that work as expected
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Because they work as you might expect, I simply list them and the section
|
||
they are found in:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
title
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
author
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
affil
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
section
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsubsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{displaymath}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{equation}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{eqnarray}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{mathletters}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{thebibliography}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
bibitem
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{table}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
label
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4, amongst other places),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablerefs
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablecomments
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
url
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.15.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.16).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The following style options also work correctly:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
preprint
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
preprint2
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
eqsecnum
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
flushrt
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3, 3.1, 3.2).
|
||
Simply put them in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Extra Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
box in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Document
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that work, but require more comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The following items work, but require a little more discussion:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
These items are reserved for use by the journal editors, but you can put
|
||
them into the LaTeX preamble if you feel compelled to do so:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
received
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
revised
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ccc
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cpright
|
||
\family default
|
||
(all from 2.1.3)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
These items may be placed in the LaTeX preamble, and are included as blanks
|
||
in the template file:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slugcomment
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
shorttitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
shortauthors
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.5)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3) -- can only be used
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
standalone
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, not in the middle of a paragraph.
|
||
Use ERT if you need to embed it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notetoeditor
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.6) -- can only be used
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
standalone
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, not in the middle of a paragraph.
|
||
Use ERT if you need to embed it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placetable
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.8) -- can't insert a cross-reference tag, you must type the tag name
|
||
by hand
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placefigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.8) -- same as for
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placetable
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
acknowledgements
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.9) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
appendix
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.10) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figcaption
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.2) -- you will have to edit the optional argument by hand in the final
|
||
LaTeX file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things not implemented, use ERT
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffilmark
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiltext
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
eqnum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setcounter{equation}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12), Journal name abbreviations (2.12.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figurenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
epsscale
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plotone
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plottwo
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tableline
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4, insert it as the first element in the lefthand cell after where
|
||
you want it.
|
||
Don't use any of LyX's rules in the table),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenotemark
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenotetext
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5), most everything in Misc (2.15, except
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
url
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email
|
||
\family default
|
||
; see above),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
singlespace
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
doublespace
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onecolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
twocolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.2)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that cannot be implemented
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
at least in any meaningful sort of way, so I suggest ignoring them.
|
||
They are the references environment (2.12.3), and the deluxetable environment
|
||
(2.14).
|
||
If you really, really need to use deluxetable, I suggest editing it in
|
||
a separate file with a text editor, then using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Include File
|
||
\family default
|
||
to include it in your LyX document.
|
||
See the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aas_sample.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
file to see an example of this.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
FAQs, Tips, Tricks, and Other Ruminations
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Getting LyX and AASTeX to cooperate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
It can be a bit tricky to get LyX to recognize a new layout and document
|
||
class.
|
||
When all else fails, do this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Make certain that LaTeX can find AASTeX.
|
||
Copy sample.tex (and perhaps table.tex) from the AASTeX distribution into
|
||
a directory completely unrelated to LaTeX or AASTeX and run LaTeX on
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
sample.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Make certain that
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aastex.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
appears in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/.../share/lyx/layouts
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.lyx/layouts
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Rerun
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Options\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Reconfigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
in LyX, then restart LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Open a regular new file, not from a template.
|
||
Does AASTeX appear in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Class
|
||
\family default
|
||
?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you get a warning from an existing AASTeX document about not being able
|
||
to find the AASTeX layout or a message about
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You should not mix title layouts with normal ones
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, things haven't been installed correctly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
LaTeX error processing a table
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX, by default, attempts to center the table caption/title.
|
||
This seems to produce a bad interaction in AASTeX so you should click somewhere
|
||
in the caption/title, then select
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
, then set the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Alignment
|
||
\family default
|
||
to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Block
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This took care of it for me.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
References
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "cite"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A few things: 1) I have noticed some funny spacing in the reference entries
|
||
in the text.
|
||
When you enter the bibliography item data, make sure their is
|
||
\emph on
|
||
no
|
||
\emph default
|
||
space between the last author and the parenthesis setting off the year;
|
||
\emph on
|
||
e.g.
|
||
\emph default
|
||
type
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Ressler(1992)
|
||
\family default
|
||
, not
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Ressler (1992)
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
2) I am really unhappy that I can't make
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
more automatic, but that would require changes to the LyX source code.
|
||
For now you can do one of two things: a) enter all your citations using
|
||
the built-in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Citation Reference
|
||
\family default
|
||
mechanism; at least you can take advantage of the automatic insertions.
|
||
Then edit the exported LaTeX file by hand changing the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
entries to the appropriate
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands before you submit it (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
is currently equivalent to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
, so you wouldn't necessarily have to change those).
|
||
Or b) you can simply enter all your citations as ERT using the same key
|
||
for the argument that you used in the bibliography popup,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
e.g.
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet{key}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Neither choice is pleasant, but until LyX's citation mechanism understands
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
natbib
|
||
\family default
|
||
, we'll have to put up with it.
|
||
3) Entering the references at all is not obvious.
|
||
The easiest thing is to start typing your first reference at the end of
|
||
the document, then mark it as type
|
||
\family sans
|
||
References
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
That will put a small gray box in front of what you just typed.
|
||
Click on the box to fill in the rest of the information.
|
||
For new references, go to the end of an existing reference and press return.
|
||
That will create a new line with its own box, etc.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Włączanie plików EPS
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
With all due respect to Chris Biemesderfer and the others who have helped
|
||
to write the AASTeX package, the figure handling mechanism smells really
|
||
foul.
|
||
You can insert the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plotone
|
||
\family default
|
||
, etc.
|
||
commands as ERT into a Figure Float box, but I never have much luck getting
|
||
the layout right.
|
||
My advice would be to avoid all EPS inclusions in the manuscript you submit
|
||
to the journal, but then use the standard LyX EPS file inclusion mechanism
|
||
when you want to make your nicer looking preprints.
|
||
LyX will insert a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\family default
|
||
command into the LaTeX preamble and handle the figures in the standard
|
||
LaTeX2e way.
|
||
Anyone who attempts to print your AASTeX 5.0 manuscript must have a LaTeX2e
|
||
installation anyway, so why not take advantage of the infinitely better
|
||
graphics handling mechanism? If they complain about LaTeX2e or the graphics
|
||
package, point out that it appears in the second edition of Lamport (1994),
|
||
so it was time to upgrade six years ago.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things I could have done, but didn't
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a few ,,pretty'' things I could have implemented, but chose not
|
||
to.
|
||
For instance, I saw no point in double-spacing the text in the LyX window,
|
||
even though it is double-spaced in the paper manuscript.
|
||
Also, I chose not to make separate layouts for the preprint and preprint2
|
||
styles.
|
||
Since I assume you will spend most of your time in the plain manuscript
|
||
mode anyway, I decided not to chew up more disk space with this.
|
||
If you feel strongly that I should make such layouts, I will adhere to
|
||
the spirit of the rules laid out by the Mudgeeraba Creek Emu-Riding and
|
||
Boomerang-Throwing Association:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
,,Decisions of the judges will be final unless shouted down by a really
|
||
overwhelming majority of the crowd present.
|
||
Abusive and obscene language may not be used by contestants when addressing
|
||
members of the judging panel, or, conversely, by members of the judging
|
||
panel when addressing contestants (unless struck by a boomerang)''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Final Caveat
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To mangle the infamous quote by Donald Knuth about a computer algorithm,
|
||
,,I have only proved this to be correct, I have not actually tried it''.
|
||
I believe following the above procedures will produce an acceptable AASTeX
|
||
document, but as of this update (Jan 25, 2000), I have not yet submitted
|
||
a paper using it.
|
||
Hopefully in the next few months \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
ijmpd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Panayotis Papasotiriou
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Overview
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The ijmpd package is a set of macros that facilitates electronic manuscript
|
||
submission to the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
International Journal of Modern Physics D
|
||
\emph default
|
||
published by World Scientific.
|
||
The name of the document class is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ws-ijmpd.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This file, together with instructions for the authors, can be downloaded
|
||
from the site
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpd/mkt/guidelines.shtml
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
The ijmpd package is a modified version of the standard
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
article
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
package.
|
||
Most of its features are supported by LyX.
|
||
I have recently used LyX successfully to write an article submitted to
|
||
the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
International Journal of Modern Physics D
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Writing a paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As usual, the easiest way to write a paper is to start with a template.
|
||
Click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
New from
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
emplate
|
||
\family default
|
||
, then choose the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ijmpd.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template.
|
||
This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common
|
||
fields found in a manuscript.
|
||
Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) with the correct information.
|
||
You should keep in mind the following remarks.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
LyX won't let you change the font size and the page style of the document,
|
||
because the ijmpd package does not allow such modifications.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
The ijmpd package requires that the language of the document should not
|
||
be changed.
|
||
Before previewing your paper, be sure that the babel package is not used.
|
||
To do this, click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
references
|
||
\family default
|
||
, select the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Language
|
||
\family default
|
||
tab (under the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lang Opts
|
||
\family default
|
||
tab), then deselect the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
se babel
|
||
\family default
|
||
option and click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
A
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pply
|
||
\family default
|
||
(or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Save
|
||
\family default
|
||
, if you wish to make this change permanent).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Two new environments, named
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Proof
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
are available (their use is obvious).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Appendices may be added to the paper.
|
||
LyX offers a special environment, called
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Appendix
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
which marks the beginning of the appendix.
|
||
An appendix can contain normal sections, subsections, or subsubsections.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
The ijmpd package implements table captions quite differently than LyX does.
|
||
As a result, a table created by LyX is printed correctly, but its caption
|
||
is ignored.
|
||
If you need table captions, you should implement the whole table float
|
||
in a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file, then include this file to the LyX document (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nsert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Inclu
|
||
\bar under
|
||
d
|
||
\bar default
|
||
e file
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Details on how to create an ijmpd table float can be found in the file
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ws-ijmpd.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which is included in the ijmpd package.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Preparing a paper for submission
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Before you submit your paper you must export the LyX document as a LaTeX
|
||
file (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
xport\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ateX
|
||
\family default
|
||
), then make the following changes to the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Remove the comment lines before the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Remove everything between (and including) the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, except for any commands you specifically put into the LaTeX preamble.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The modified
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file should be saved and processed through LaTeX as many times as necessary.
|
||
You may also want to check the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Use of ERT
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użycie wstawek ERT jest opcjonalne i jest zredukowane do trzech poleceń,
|
||
which affect the look of the page.
|
||
If you started writing your paper by using the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ijmpd.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template, the ERT needed is already in its place; you usually don't need
|
||
to delete it.
|
||
You may only change the first ERT to specify the information printed to
|
||
the top of odd and even pages (authors' names and short paper's title,
|
||
respectively).
|
||
This ERT must have the form
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markboth{Authors' Names}{Short Paper's Title}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Kluwer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Panayotis Papasotiriou
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przegląd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer jest zestawem makr wydanych przez Kluwer Academic Publishers
|
||
aby ułatwić elektroniczną wysyłkę manuskryptów do pism wydawanych przez
|
||
wydawnictwo.
|
||
Najbardziej znane z nich (at least in my domain of interest), to
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysics and Space Science
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Solar Physics
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, ale istnieje wiele innych (zobacz kompletną listę pod adresem
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.wkap.nl/jrnllist.htm/JRNLHOME
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer można pobrać z serwisu
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.wkap.nl/kaphtml.htm/STYLEFILES
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Kompletna dokumentacja jest zawarta w pakiecie (ale można pobrać ją oddzielnie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX obsługuje wiele cech pakietu ale nie wszystkie.
|
||
Mimo to wstawki ERT są potrzebne do redukcji ,,osobliwych'' poleceń pakietu
|
||
(zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Ja ostatnio napisałem bez żadnych problemów artykuł wysłany do pisma
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysics and Space Science
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Pisanie artykułów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najłatwiejszą drogą do napisania nowego artykułu jest skorzystanie z szablonu.
|
||
Wybierz polecenie z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z szablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, a następnie wybierz plik szablonu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
kluwer.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Otrzymasz wówczas (prawie) pusty dokument, który zawiera większość pól
|
||
z manuskryptu z krótkim opisem ich użycia.
|
||
I jak w większości szablonów zastąp istniejące teksty (włączając nawiasy
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) poprawnymi informacjami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przygotowanie artykułu do wysłania
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podobnie jak przy pakiecie AASTeX przed wysyłką artykułu do wydawnictwa,
|
||
artykuł należy przetworzyć, co opisano dalej w kolejnych krokach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wyeksportuj artykuł do pliku LaTeX.
|
||
Zrób to przez wybór polecenia z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wyedytuj uzyskany plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
w edytorze tekstowym dokonując następujących zmian:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
usuń wiersze komentarza przed poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
usuń wszystko pomiędzy dyrektywami
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
włącznie, z wyjątkiem Twoich specyficznych poleceń wstawionych do preambuły.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zapisz uzyskany plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Przetwórz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
przez LaTeX tyle razy ile potrzeba (zwykle do trzech razy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Zobacz utworzony plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
korzystając z przeglądarki np.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
xdvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
i sprawdź czy wszystko jest ok (tak powinno być jeśli nie popełniłeś błędów).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
,,Osobliwości'' pakietu Kluwer
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer posiada następujące ,,osobliwości'':
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jest możliwe pisanie wielu artykułów w tym samym pliku LaTeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Nie mogę wyobrazić sobie innego dobrego powodu aby to zrobić
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Każdy artykuł musi być zawarty w środowisku ,,article''.
|
||
Niestety, tego środowiska nie można pominąć, nawet jeśli piszemy tylko
|
||
jeden artykuł.
|
||
Dlatego każdy artykuł zaczyna się poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{article}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i kończy oczywiście poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{article}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Mimo to można to zaimplementować w LyX-ie, ale ja nie dołączam tego, od
|
||
czasu jak to wygląda brzydko i może peszyć nowych użytkowników.
|
||
Dlatego Ty potrzebujesz wpisać te polecenia wprost jako kod LaTeX (jako
|
||
wstawki ERT).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Informacje podane na początku artykułu (np.: title, subtitle, author, institution
|
||
, running title, running author, abstract i keywords) muszą znajdować się
|
||
w
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
środowisku ,,opening''.
|
||
Tego nie zaimplementowano w LyX-ie, tak że Ty musisz umieścić title, subtitle
|
||
itd.
|
||
pomiędzy dwoma wstawkami ERT (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{opening}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{opening}
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Według podręcznika użytkownika etykieta każdej pozycji bibliografii musi
|
||
być zapisana jako
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
protect
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citeauthoryear{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
author(s)
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
year
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Szablon
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
kluwer.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
zajmuje się tymi wszystkimi ,,osobliwościami'' Jeśli zaczynasz z nowym
|
||
artykułem korzystając z tego szablonu, to nie potrzebujesz robić nic specjalneg
|
||
o.
|
||
Tylko:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
nie usuwaj wstawek ERT dołączonych do szablonu i
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
skopiuj przykładową bibliografię dołączona do szablonu i dostosuj ją przez
|
||
dopisanie nowych pozycji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Koma-Script
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Bernd Rellermeyer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przegląd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX-owe klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
odpowiadają LaTeX-owym klasom odpowiednio
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrartcl.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrreprt.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrbook.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrlettr.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, z rodziny Koma-Script.
|
||
Zastępują one standardowe klasy dokumentu odpowiednio
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
article.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
report.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
book.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
letter.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i są bliższe europejskim konwencjom typograficznym
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Standardową wielkością czcionki jest 11pt w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, oraz 12pt w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tytularia, etykiety opisu środowisk i kilka elementów klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
są składane czcionką półgrubą bezszeryfową
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Istnieje duża różnica pomiędzy starymi półgrubymi czcionkami bezszeryfowymi
|
||
rodziny cm, a nowymi rodziny ec, szczególnie w wyglądzie tytulariów.
|
||
Dla porównania półgruba czcionka bezszeryfowa rodziny ec wygląda na troszkę
|
||
cieńszą.
|
||
Pakiet LaTeX-a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmsd.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
autorstwa
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Walter Schmidta
|
||
\shape default
|
||
pomaga tworzyć ,,zwykły'' wygląd przy użyciu czcionek ec.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Numeracja tytułów rozdziałów jest zrobiona tak samo jak numeracja sekcji,
|
||
czyli bez wiersza ,,Rozdział\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
''.
|
||
Ponadto wygląd tytulariów może być zmieniony za pomocą kilku opcji (w LyX-ie
|
||
wprowadza się je w polach
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje Dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
wywołanym z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Głównym zamierzeniem projektowania obszaru pisania klas dokumentu Koma-Script
|
||
są opcje
|
||
\family sans
|
||
BCOR
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
DIV
|
||
\family default
|
||
(w LyX-ie wprowadza się je w polach
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje Dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
wywołanym z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Dzięki nim mamy klarowną możliwość zmiany szerokości marginesów jako opcje
|
||
w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Klasy LaTeX-owe rodziny Koma-Script definiują kilka dodatkowych poleceń.
|
||
Część z nich, które mają sens w LyX-ie są zaimplementowane w odpowiednich
|
||
środowiskach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Szczegółowy opis (w języku niemieckim) LaTeX-owych klas dokumentu rodziny
|
||
Koma-Script można znaleźć w dokumentacji Koma-Script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
scrguide
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Istnieje angielskie tłumaczenie --
|
||
\emph on
|
||
screnggu
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, ale nie jest kompletne
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\emph default
|
||
Dalsze punkty opisują tylko te aspekty, które są związane z LyX-em.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Klasy article (koma-script), report (koma-script) i book (koma-script)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
są zaimplementowane w plikach układu, odpowiednio:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrartcl.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrreprt.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrbook.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawierają one wszystkie środowiska odpowiednich standardowych klas dokumentu
|
||
odpowiednio
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, częściowo zmienione z wyłączeniem LyX-owego środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które jest zastąpione przez nowe środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
o takiej samej funkcji.
|
||
Jednak środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
zostało dodane do kilku nowych środowisk, ale nie są one częścią klasy
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
: są odpowiednikami dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Chapter*
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Section*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, dodatkowo dają wpis do spisu treści.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie istnieje w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap*
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec*
|
||
\family default
|
||
: zachowują się dokładnie tak jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
, additionally clearing running heads.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap*
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie istnieje w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Minisec
|
||
\family default
|
||
: generuje tytuł tuż nad następnym akapitem w standardowej wielkości czcionki
|
||
bez wpływu na strukturę dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następujące środowiska, razem ze standardowymi:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, tworzą stronę tytułową dokumentu.
|
||
Muszą być wstawione na początku pierwszego ,,normalnego'' akapitu
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Odpowiednie polecenia LaTeX muszą pojawić się przed poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
maketitle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Gdy dane środowisko jest użyte częściej niż jeden raz, to zostanie uwzględnione
|
||
tylko ostatnie jego wystąpienie w tekście.
|
||
Te dodatkowe środowiska, podobnie jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, nie wpływają na wygląd tworzonego dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit powyżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) z tematem dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Publishers
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit poniżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) z nazwą wydawcy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dedication
|
||
\family default
|
||
: w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit z dedykacją na oddzielnej stronie za stroną
|
||
tytułową, a w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit z dedykacją poniżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Titlehead
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyrównany do lewej powyżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) dla nagłówka dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Uppertitleback
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy w druku dwustronnym w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
na tyle strony tytułowej u góry wyrównany do lewej akapit, a w przypadku
|
||
druku jednostronnego lub klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
nie jest składane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lowertitleback
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy w druku dwustronnym w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
na tyle strony tytułowej u dołu wyrównany do lewej akapit, a w przypadku
|
||
druku jednostronnego lub klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
nie jest składane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Extratitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy specjalną ,,brudną'' stronę na początku dokumentu zawierającą akapit
|
||
bez specjalnego formatowania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pliki układu dla klas dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
włączają plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrmacros.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Który jest właściwym miejscem do definiowania własnych środowisk.
|
||
Skopiuj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrmacros.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
do swojego osobistego foldera układów i wyedytuj go!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Klasa letter (koma-script)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest zaimplementowana w pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrlettr.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawiera on wszystkie środowiska odpowiadające standardowej klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, częściowo zmienione z wyłączeniem LyX-owych środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX
|
||
\family default
|
||
-
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Code
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które są zastąpione przez nowe środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
o takiej samej funkcji.
|
||
Ponadto zawiera, w odróżnieniu od standardowej klasy, standardowe środowiska
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dodatkowo jest kilka nowych specyficznych środowisk.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wygląd listu złożonego w tej klasie dokumentu może być sterowany za pomocą
|
||
kilku poleceń LaTeX-a (w LyX-ie można je wprowadzić wybierając z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
reambuła LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Na przykład, standardowy wygląd nagłówka listu zawierający nazwę i adres
|
||
jest całkowicie self-willed.
|
||
,,Podstawowy'' nagłówek jest tworzony za pomocą następujących poleceń w
|
||
preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
firsthead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromname
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromaddress}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
nexthead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromname
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hfill
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pagename
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Dzięki temu autor listu może utworzyć swój własny układ.
|
||
Szczegółowy opis (w języku niemieckim) LaTeX-owych klas dokumentu rodziny
|
||
Koma-Script można znaleźć w dokumentacji Koma-Script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
scrguide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
definiują początek listu i muszą być użyte w każdym liście.
|
||
Dla podkreślenia ich w dokumencie, są zaznaczone literami odpowiednio
|
||
\family sans
|
||
L
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
O
|
||
\family default
|
||
na lewym marginesie.
|
||
To umożliwia napisanie dowolnej liczby listów w jednym pliku.
|
||
Środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy nowy list używając tego samego adresu, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy nowy adres.
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PS
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CC
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Encl
|
||
\family default
|
||
są podstawowymi środowiskami i mogą być używane wielokrotnie w tym samym
|
||
liście.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na adres i definiuje początek listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit dla adresu i zaczyna nowy list.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na tekst zamykający list.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PS
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na Postscriptum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CC
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na listę rozdzielnika (Do wiadomości).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Encl
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit dla załączników.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Backaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Specialmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Location
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
wyświetlają etykiety, dla ułatwienia wpisywania, których zawartość jest
|
||
przetwarzana przez klasę letter (Koma-Script)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It could be seen as a matter of inconsequence, that the types
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
described above are not such input types as well.
|
||
Because of the special meaning of those types, however, I have implemented
|
||
them as ordinary paragraph types with a one letter mark in the left margin.
|
||
Moreover, it would affect my feeling of symmetry, if the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
type and the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
type had such a serious different appearance.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Te środowiska muszą być użyte na początku odpowiedniego środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Implementacja tych środowisk w trybie WYSIWYG nie ma sensu, ponieważ rzeczywisty
|
||
wygląd złożonego listu zależy nie tylko od użycia właściwego środowiska,
|
||
ale także innych czynników.
|
||
Na przykład podpis wprowadzony w środowisku
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
będzie pojawiał się tylko w liście, w którym użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
standardowo nie będzie pojawiać się przy wszystkich złożonych listach.
|
||
Możliwość projektowania wolnych nagłówków listu jest już wspomniana w przypisie
|
||
powyżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska mogą być także używane jako puste akapity.
|
||
To ma sens np.
|
||
dla środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie zostało w ogóle użyte, to standardowo jest zastępowane zawartością
|
||
środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ale jeśli mamy puste środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
to nie jest niczym zastępowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przez użycie środowisk można utworzyć szablon listu, z częściowo wypełnionymi
|
||
polami środowisk (np.
|
||
Name, Address itd).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
: nazwa nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się jako wyśrodkowany akapit w nagłówku
|
||
listu.
|
||
Tekst pisany jest dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
: podpis nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się poniżej treści środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
to zamiast niego pojawia się zawartość
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
: adres nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się jako wyśrodkowany akapit w nagłówku
|
||
listu, poniżej nazwy nadawcy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
: numer telefonu nadawcy, pojawia się tylko, gdy jest włączona zmienna LaTeX
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
telephonenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
: miejsce napisania listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
: data napisania listu.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
standardowo składane są w wierszu poniżej pola adresu nadawcy wyrównane
|
||
do prawej.
|
||
Jeśli środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest puste, to zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie pojawi się.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to domyślnie pobierana jest data składu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Backaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
: adres zwrotny, standardowo składany jest powyżej adresu docelowego małą
|
||
czcionką bezszeryfową.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Specialmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
: uwagi dla poczty (np.
|
||
do rąk własnych), standardowo pojawiają się pomiędzy adresem zwrotnym a
|
||
docelowym, i są podkreślone.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Location
|
||
\family default
|
||
: dodatkowa informacja, standardowo pojawia się przy prawym marginesie poniżej
|
||
adresu docelowego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tytuł listu, standardowo pojawia się złożony wielką i półgrubą czcionką
|
||
bezszeryfową powyżej tematu listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
: temat listu, standard złożony jest czcionką półgrubą powyżej akapitu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourref
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Myref
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Customer
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invoice
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzą listy firmowe przez złożenie zawartości tych środowisk powyżej wiersza
|
||
tytułowego.
|
||
Dla pola daty używana jest zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli wykorzystane jest choć jedno ze środowisk ,,biznesowych'', to zawartość
|
||
środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest składana, tylko ustawiana jest zmienna LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromplace
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
te środowiska muszą być użyte przed odpowiednim środowiskiem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourref
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Wasz znak (Your ref.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Wasz list (Your letter of.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Myref
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Nasz znak (Our ref.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Customer
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Klient (Customer no.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invoice
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Nr faktury (Invoice no.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przedstawienie WYSIWYG w LyX-ie dokumentów w klasie Koma-Script powoduje
|
||
kilka problemów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Numery rozdziałów środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Chapter
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wyświetlane w wierszu powyżej tytułu rozdziału.
|
||
Taki przypadek jest spowodowany wewnętrznym przetwarzaniem przez LyX środowiska
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Counter_Chapter
|
||
\family default
|
||
w pliku układu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tytuły środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wstawione tylko do ,,prawdziwego'' LaTeX-owego spisu treści, a nie są
|
||
wyświetlane LyX-owym spisie treści (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tryb separacji akapitów w dokumencie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
wyświetlany jest jako odstęp, a nie wcięcie.
|
||
To jest standardowe zachowanie, do tego nie potrzeba żadnego polecenia
|
||
LaTeX-a.
|
||
Ale w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
odpowiedni przełącznik wskazuje na załączony tryb
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
cięcie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Tryb
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dstęp
|
||
\family default
|
||
daje efekt po użyciu odpowiedniego polecenia LaTeX-a wstawionego do dokumentu
|
||
do wytworzenia odstępu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Springer Journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
svjour
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Opis
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj opisujemy klasy i pliki układu używanych dla niektórych pism wydawanych
|
||
przez wydawnictwo Springer Verlag i wymienionych na stronie
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.springer.de/author/tex/help-journals.html
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, skąd powinieneś móc pobrać pliki klasy (tak, oczywiście teraz dla LaTeX2e!).
|
||
To jest modularny system: wspólne części dla wszystkich pism są zaimplementowan
|
||
e w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjour.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
, z którego korzystają specyficzne dla danego pisma pliki układu (np.:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
) .
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oznacza to, że implementacja wsparcia dla innego pisma wydawnictwa Springer
|
||
wymaga napisania własnego pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
sv
|
||
\family default
|
||
<myjournal>
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
na podstawie pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu LyX-a była testowana tylko dla pisma
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjour
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog
|
||
\family default
|
||
są zawarte w standardowej dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
Zainstaluj pobraną z serwera wydawnictwa Springer odpowiednią klasę LaTeX-ową
|
||
w odpowiednim katalogu TeX-a, odśwież bazę pakietów TeX-a (w teTeX-u uruchom
|
||
polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
texhash
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jako root jeśli jest to niezbędne), zrekonfiguruj LyX-a i powinno już
|
||
działać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nowe style
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Duża liczba stylów typu theorem --
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Claim, Conjecture,
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Headnote, Dedication, Subtitle, Running_LaTeX_Title, Author_Running, Institute,
|
||
Mail, Offprints, Keywords, Acknowledgements, Acknowledgement
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zobacz dokumentację do pakietu aby poznać szczegóły.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane pisma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Probability Theory and Related Fields
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svprobth.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Jean-Marc Lasgouttes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dodaj własne -- to nie jest trudne!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Podziękowania
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te pliki bazują częściowo na starszym pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
, który bazował na starym stylu LaTeX 2.09 z wydawnictwa Springer.
|
||
Wszystko to i układ
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2
|
||
\family default
|
||
teraz nie działa.
|
||
Jean-Marc Lasgouttes bardzo pomógł mi znaleźć drogę implementacji układu
|
||
w LyX-ie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Błędy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Prawdopodobne.
|
||
Ale prawdopodobnie mniej niż w starej klasie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ograniczenia np.: nie wyświetla numeru środowisk typu theorem, w tej chwili
|
||
#.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AGU journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
aguplus
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These are the layout files for some of the journals of the American Geophysical
|
||
Society.
|
||
It is assumed that you have both the AGU's own class files and AGUplus
|
||
installed (everything to be found at
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.agu.org/journals/latex/journals
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New styles
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Redefined are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Paragraph*
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
They are still called this in the LyX GUI, though their LaTeX equivalents
|
||
in the AGU classes are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsubsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsubsection*
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Newly defined styles are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Left_Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Received
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revised
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CCC
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PaperId
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
AuthorAddr
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
SlugComment
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
These are mostly manuscript attributes and defined in the AGU class documentati
|
||
on.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I suspect this is still badly incomplete.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New floats
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Planotable
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plate
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
We also have a new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Table_Caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Supported journals
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geophysical Research
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
jgrga.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Add your own, it isn't so hard! Look at the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
jgrga.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
example and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aguplus.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
EGS journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
egs
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This is the layout file for the European Geophysical Society journals.
|
||
The needed
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
egs.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
can be downloaded from the web site of the EGS under
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
www.copernicus.org
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New styles
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_address, Latex_Title, Affil, Journal, msnumber, FirstAuthor, Received,
|
||
Accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Offsets
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
The current layout file is unfortunately very unmodular and would benefit
|
||
from using the various
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
std*.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
file inclusions.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Slides [aka
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX]
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slitex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisujemy jak użyć LyX-a do przygotowania slajdów do rzutników.
|
||
Istnieją dwie klasy dokumentów, które można do tego celu zastosować: domyślnie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX.
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano pierwszą z nich.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powiem to jeszcze raz, jasno, aby nie buło nieporozumień:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
|
||
\size large
|
||
Ta sekcja dokumentu opisuje
|
||
\emph on
|
||
tylko
|
||
\emph default
|
||
klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli szukasz dokumentacji do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', zajrzyj do sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''] jest aktualnie trochę lepsza niż domyślnie klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
lub tak powtarzam za jej adwokatami.
|
||
Nigdy jej nie używałem i nie wiem czy to jest prawda czy nie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ta klasa jest ulepszeniem LaTeX2e starego pakietu
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX package.
|
||
Każda dystrybucja LaTeX2e zawiera tę klasę [którą, od teraz, będę nazywał
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
''], tak więc jesteś zmuszony ją mieć.
|
||
Jak wspomniałem wcześniej istnieją inne klasy, jak np.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które także tworzą slajdy do rzutnika i wykonują to zadanie lepiej niż
|
||
ta.
|
||
Jednak istnieje kilka rzeczy, które klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
może zrobić, a inne nie, np.
|
||
generowanie overlays.
|
||
Czytaj dalej aby dowiedzieć się więcej!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slidesetup"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście, aby użyć tej klasy dokumentu, potrzebujesz wybrać klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lass
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka rzeczy, które powinieneś wiedzieć o tej klasie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Strony i Page cols
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Nie są one obsługiwane przez klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
W oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
lista styli dostępna w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
agestyle
|
||
\family default
|
||
zachowuje się troszkę inaczej dla tej klasy.
|
||
Dostępne są nastepujące style:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
W prawym dolnym narożniku slajdu umieszony zostanie numer slajdu,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
headings
|
||
\family default
|
||
Podobnie jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ale dodatkowo zostana wstawione krzyżyki w rogach folii dla dokładnego
|
||
pozycjonowania przy nakładaniu folii jedna na drugą.
|
||
To jest styl domyślny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
empty
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie jest dodawany numer, data ani znaczniki wyrównania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
posiada dodatkową opcję:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby ją użyć, wpisz ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje doda
|
||
\bar under
|
||
t
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użycie tej opcji pozwala dodać znacznik daty do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideNote"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz użyć szablonu ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
slides.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' aby automatycznie ustawić klasę nowego dokumentu na
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
[za pomoca polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
szablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby utworzyć nowy dokument].
|
||
Plik szablonu zawiera także kilka przykładów specjalnych środowisk akapitów
|
||
taj klasy.
|
||
Będzie to opisane dalej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska akapitów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszą rzeczą, którą powinieneś zauważyć gdy zaczynasz nowy dokument slajdów
|
||
jest rozmiar i typ czcionki: odpowiednio ,,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Largest
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i czcionka bezszeryfowa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Sans
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Serif
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This is also what's used in the output.
|
||
Think of this as a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
visual cue
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to remind you that this is a slide.
|
||
Your final slides will use a larger font; ergo, you'll have less space.
|
||
Of course, the larger default screen font isn't WYSIWYG, only a reminder.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The next thing that becomes obvious is the changes to the paragraph environment
|
||
pull-down box [at the far-left end of the toolbar].
|
||
Most of the paragraph environments you're used to seeing are missing.
|
||
There are also four new ones.
|
||
That's because the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class itself only supports certain paragraph environments:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie inne standardowe środowiska włączając środowiska sekcji nie są
|
||
używane w klasie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Z drugiej zaś strony zauważysz nowe środowiska:
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
In prior versions of this class, there was the mandatory
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EndAllSlides
|
||
\family default
|
||
paragraph environment.
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EndAllSlides
|
||
\family default
|
||
is deprecated; it will convert to a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
You should probably remove it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These five are kind of quirky, due to a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
feature
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in LyX.
|
||
You see, LyX doesn't permit you to nest any other paragraph environment
|
||
into an empty environment.
|
||
Now, that's fine and dandy, but it means that you wouldn't be able to start
|
||
a slide with anything except plain text.
|
||
To deal with this, I've performed a little
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
LaTeX magic.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Quirks of the New Environments
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
All five of the new paragraph environments are somewhat quirky due to inherent
|
||
limitiations in the current version of LyX.
|
||
As I just mentioned, LyX forbids environments that begin with another environme
|
||
nt.
|
||
To get around this, the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment isn't a paragraph environment as described in the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
User's Guide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You should consider
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
to be ,,pseudo-environments''.
|
||
They look like a section heading or a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
but really begin a [and, if necessary, end the previous] paragraph environment.
|
||
Likewise, treat
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invisible Text
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
as
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pseudo-commands.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
These two perform some action.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A common feature of all five environments,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, is a rather long-ish label.
|
||
The text following this label --- ordinarily the contents of the paragraph
|
||
environment --- is utterly irrelevant for
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX completely ignores it.
|
||
In fact, you can leave these five environments completely empty.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
While you don't
|
||
\emph on
|
||
have
|
||
\emph default
|
||
to put any text after the rather long-ish label, you might want to.
|
||
This could be a short description of the contents of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, for example.
|
||
In that case, enter in your descriptive comment and hit
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Return
|
||
\family default
|
||
as you normally would.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If, on the other hand, you don't want to enter in any descriptive text,
|
||
you'll hit another LyX quirk.
|
||
LyX, like nature, abhors a vacuum, and will not let you start a new paragraph
|
||
environment until you put something in the old one.
|
||
So, do this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Start entering the text that will
|
||
\emph on
|
||
follow
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Now move to the beginning of that paragraph.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Next, hit
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Return
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Finally, change this new, empty paragraph to a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Some future version of LyX will, hopefully, resolve this quirkiness\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Tworzenie prezentacji używając
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you're expecting this section to teach you how to actually make a presentatio
|
||
n, you'll be sorely disappointed.
|
||
Naturally, I'll describe all of the ways the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class can assist you in preparing the materials for a presentation.
|
||
Filling in the contents, however, is up to you.
|
||
[Then again, that
|
||
\emph on
|
||
is
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the LyX philosophy.]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Choosing the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment [in the manner described in section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
] tells LyX to begin a new slide [duh].
|
||
The label for this environment/
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pseudo-command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
is an
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in cool blue, followed by the label,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewSlide:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Any text or paragraph environments that follow this one go on the new slide.
|
||
It's that simple.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Slides are probably the only time you'll need to forcibly end pages in LyX.
|
||
In fact, you'll want to, once you finish entering the contents of one slide.
|
||
If you've entered more text than can physically fit on a slide, the extra
|
||
overflows onto a new slide.
|
||
I don't recommend doing this, however, since the overflow slide won't have
|
||
any page number on it.
|
||
Furthermore, it may interfere with any
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
you've made to accompany the oversized
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
environments work the same way as the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment.
|
||
They both create an
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
followed by a label [
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewOverlay:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewNote:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, respectively].
|
||
The color is a stunning magenta instead of blue, and the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
will look different, in style and in length.
|
||
The label fonts of all three also differ from one another.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As with a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, if the contents of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
exceed the physical size of a slide or sheet of paper, the extra will overflow
|
||
onto a new sheet.
|
||
Again, you should avoid this.
|
||
It defeats the whole purpose of
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
ze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The idea behind an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is a slide that sits atop another slide.
|
||
Perhaps you wish to discuss a figure on the main
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
before displaying the text associated with it.
|
||
One way to accomplish this is tape a flap of dark paper over the part of
|
||
the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
you want to display later.
|
||
This method fails, however, if you wish to overlap one graph with another,
|
||
for example.
|
||
You would then have to fumble while speaking to align the two separate,
|
||
overlapping
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s to align the two graphs.
|
||
The use of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment in both cases makes life much easier.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Each
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
receives the page number of its
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, appended by
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Presumably, mutliple
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s would have
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-b
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-c
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, etc.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
appended to the page number of the parent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
to each fit on a single physical slide! You should probably consider an
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
as ,,part of'' a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Indeed, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class provides a visual cue for this: the label at the start of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shorter than that at the start of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Lastly, when you generate printable output, you'll find alignment markers
|
||
in all four corners of both the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
page and its parent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
These will assist you in lining up the two physical slides.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The major problem in overlaying two slides is aligning the contents of the
|
||
two transparencies.
|
||
How much space should you leave for that graph on the second slide? Worse
|
||
still, what if you want a graph and a sentence on second slide, but there
|
||
is text on the main transparency that goes in between them? You could try
|
||
and insert vertical space of the right size.
|
||
The better way is to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As their names imply,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
are two command-like paragraph environments that make all subsequent text
|
||
invisible and visible, respectively.
|
||
Note from section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
that you don't place anything
|
||
\emph on
|
||
into
|
||
\emph default
|
||
these two environments, however.
|
||
When you create an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, it inserts a centered, sky-blue label into the page reading
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<Invisible Text Follows>
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
For paragraphs following this label, the parts of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
[or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
; it doesn't matter which] where they would be contain instead blank space.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
For
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, the corresponding centered label is
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<Visible Text Follows>
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in blazing green.
|
||
Paragraphs following this label behave normally.
|
||
Note that the beginning of a new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
automatically shuts off an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
It's therefore not necessary to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
at the end of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
By now, it should be obvious how to create overlay transparencies using
|
||
the proper combination of
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
on a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Create a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, including everything that will appear on it, whether on the main slide
|
||
or on the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Before each figure or paragraph that will appear only on the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, insert an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment.
|
||
If necessary, insert a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment after the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
-only text.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Start an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
immediately following the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Copy the contents of this
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
into the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Within the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, change all of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
lines to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and vice-versa.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
That's it.
|
||
You've just made an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There's one problem with the way I've designed the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class: you can't make text in the middle of a paragraph invisible, nor
|
||
make text in the middle of an invisible paragraph visible again.
|
||
To accomplish this feat, you'll need to use some inlined LaTeX codes.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The commands of interest are:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
invisible \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
visible \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
and need to be marked as TeX.
|
||
The text whose
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
visibility
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
you wish to change goes in between the brackets [and after the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
invisible
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
visible
|
||
\family default
|
||
command].
|
||
If you don't know how to mark text as TeX, see the apprpriate section of
|
||
the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
User's Guide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slideNote"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Like an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is associated with a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Here, too, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class provides visual cues.
|
||
The label for a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shorter than that of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
[yet longer than that of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
] and, like the label of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shockingly magenta.
|
||
Additionally, the printed
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
has the page number of its
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, appended by
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
1
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
3
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, etc.
|
||
You can have multiple
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s associated with a single
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and, as with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you'll probably want to break up long
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s so that they fit on a single sheet of paper.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is obvious: it contains anything additional you might want to say about
|
||
a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
It could also be used as a sheet of reminders for a particular
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
In the case of the latter, you might want to make use of time markers.
|
||
Currently, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class has no
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
native
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
support for time markers, a
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX feature.
|
||
So, you'll have to resort to using the LaTeX codes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To use time markers, you'll need to specify the extra class option
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
[see section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slidesetup"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
].
|
||
This option turns on timing marks, which will appear in the lower-left-hand
|
||
corner of every
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
you generate.
|
||
To set what appears in the time marker, you use the LaTeX commands
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
settime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
addtime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
The arguments of both commands are time measured in seconds.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
settime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
sets the time marker to a given time.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
addtime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
increments the time marker by the specified amount.
|
||
Using time markers and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s in this fashion, you can remind yourself how much time to spend on a particula
|
||
r
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There's one last feature to describe.
|
||
Clearly, you'd like to print out all of your
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s on transparencies while printing all of your
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s on plain paper.
|
||
However, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
must
|
||
\emph default
|
||
follow the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
with which it is associated.
|
||
What's a person to do?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Luckily, there are two LaTeX commands that allow you to select what to print
|
||
out.
|
||
Both must be placed into the preamble of your document.
|
||
The command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
will cause the output to contain only the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
Correspondingly, the command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
prevents the output of anything but
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
I'd advise placing both commands in the preamble and initially comment
|
||
both out.
|
||
You can then preview your entire presentation as you write.
|
||
When you're done writing, you can then uncomment one of the two to select
|
||
what you want to print.
|
||
I like to uncomment
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, print to a file with
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in its name, comment it back out, then uncomment
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and print to a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
*-notes.ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
file.
|
||
I can then send either file to a printer, loading transparencies or plain
|
||
paper as appropriate.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You can also provide other arguments to the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
commands.
|
||
See a good LaTeX book for details.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Plik szablonu klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wraz z klasą
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
dostarczyłem także plik szablonu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
slides.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby go użyć zacznij Twoją nową prezentację przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Twój nowy plik prezentacji będzie zawierał jako przykład trójkę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
--
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
--
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
dodatkowo zawierają jako przykład użycia tekst niewidzialny (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
) i widzialny (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Na koniec zawartość preambuły:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% Uncomment to print out only slides and overlays
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% Uncomment to print out only notes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I ostatnia rzecz: utworzyłem tę klasę LyX-a do obsługi klasy LaTeX2e ,,
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX emulation'', one of the built-in LaTeX2e classes.
|
||
Neither I nor the rest of the LyX Team endorse or oppose the use of this
|
||
built-in slide class.
|
||
It's here if you want it or need it.
|
||
Istnieją inne klasy LaTeX2e do tworzenia prezentacji, takie jak:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
] lub pakiet ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
seminar
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' [znajdujący się w wielu dystrybucjach TeX-a].
|
||
Ten ostatni nie jest jeszcze obsługiwany przez LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Aktualnie znajduje się plik układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
seminar.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale nie ma jeszcze pliku szablonu i dokumentacji jak z niego skorzystać
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Try them out to see what sort of alternative they provide.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Foils [aka
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
\noun on
|
||
TeX
|
||
\noun default
|
||
]
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisujemy jak użyć LyX-a do przygotowania slajdów do rzutników.
|
||
Istnieją dwie klasy dokumentów, które można do tego celu zastosować: domyślnie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX.
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano tę drugą klasę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powiem to jeszcze raz, jasno, aby nie było nieporozumień:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
|
||
\size large
|
||
Ta sekcja dokumentu opisuje
|
||
\emph on
|
||
tylko
|
||
\emph default
|
||
klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli szukasz dokumentacji do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default
|
||
\family default
|
||
)'', zajrzyj do sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slitex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli w Twoim systemie nie masz zainstalowanej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[,,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''], to prawdopodobnie musisz użyć domyślnej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która nie jest tak dobra jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest zaprojektowana do użycia z wersją 2.1 LaTeX-owej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która jest teraz integralną częścią LaTeX2e.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście, aby użyć tej klasy dokumentu, potrzebujesz wybrać klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lass
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka ustawień w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl Dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
i powinieneś znać ich specyfikę w tej klasie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Strony i Page cols
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Nie są one obsługiwane przez klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Domyślną wielkością czcionki jest 20pt, inne to 17pt, 25pt i 30pt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Domyślną rodziną jest czcionka
|
||
\family sans
|
||
bezszeryfowa
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale równania matematyczne są składane zwykłą czcionką szeryfową.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX obsługuje formaty papieru A4 i Letter, a także specjalny rozmiar do
|
||
pracy z 35mm slajdami.
|
||
Nie obsługuje formatów: A5, B5, legal i executive.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj ustawień
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Pozycja wstawki
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ponieważ są one ignorowane.
|
||
Wszystkie wstawki pojawiają się w miejscu gdzie zostały umieszczone w tekście.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Ustawienia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
agestyle
|
||
\family default
|
||
zachowują się troszkę inaczej w tej klasie.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza rozszerzone możliwości nagłówków i stopek włączają w to logo
|
||
użytkownika.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foilfoot"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
Strona tytułowa jest traktowana inaczej niż inne strony dokumentu:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
zawsze
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest nienumerowana i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
zawsze
|
||
\emph default
|
||
logo jest wycentrowane u dołu strony (jeśli je zdefiniowano).
|
||
Możliwe do wyboru style strony:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\series bold
|
||
empty
|
||
\family default
|
||
\series default
|
||
Nie jest dodawany numer ani inne nagłówki i stopki,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\series bold
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
\series default
|
||
Na dole w środku slajdu umieszczony zostanie numer slajdu.
|
||
bez innych nagłówków i stopek (innych niż przypisy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
foilheadings
|
||
\series default
|
||
W prawym dolnym narożniku slajdu umieszczony zostanie numer slajdu.
|
||
Dodatkowe nagłówki i stopki zostaną wyświetlone.
|
||
To jest styl domyślny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
fancy
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umożliwia skorzystanie z pakietu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancyheadings
|
||
\family default
|
||
mimo, że jego użycie z
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX nie jest polecane przez autorów pakietu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX z powodu kilku możliwych rozjechań się układu strony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Opcje dodatkowe
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następujące opcje mogą być użyte w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl Dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
35mmSlide
|
||
\series default
|
||
Ustawia rozmiar strony 7.33 cale na 11 cali.
|
||
Taki rozmiar ma identyczne proporcje jak 35mm slajd.
|
||
To ustawienie ułatwia pracę z tym medium,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
headrule
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umieszcza poziomą linię poniżej nagłówka na każdej stronie z wyjątkiem
|
||
strony tytułowej,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
footrule
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umieszcza poziomą linię powyżej stopki na każdej stronie z wyjątkiem strony
|
||
tytułowej,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
dvips
|
||
\series default
|
||
Ta opcja jest automatycznie włączona
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Bez tej opcji możesz korzystać wprost z pdfLaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdy tworzysz nowy dokument w tej klasie.
|
||
Opcja ta mówi
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-owi aby użył jako sterownika programu dvips do obrotu tych stron, które
|
||
ustawiono jako poziome,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
landscape
|
||
\series default
|
||
Po prostu zmienia układ strony na poziomy, ale nie dokonuje obrotu.
|
||
Dla tego jeśli chcesz używać tej opcji potrzebujesz użyć zewnętrznego programu
|
||
do obrotu każdej strony lub włóż papier do drukarki poziomo.
|
||
Uwaga ta opcja zamienia role środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
(nie przejmuj się jest to opisane w następnej sekcji),
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
leqno
|
||
\series default
|
||
Numeracja równań po lewej stronie równania,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
fleqn
|
||
\series default
|
||
Wyrównuje równania do lewej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Większość zwykłych środowisk występujących w innych klasach jest także obsługiwa
|
||
nych w klasie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka dodatkowych środowisk dostarczanych przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX a także kilka dodanych przez LyX-a.
|
||
Poniżej podano standardowe środowiska występujące również w innych klasach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{multicols}{2}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Bibliography
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
RightAddress
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{multicols}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następne są główne środowiska niezależnie od środowisk strukturyzujących
|
||
tekst.
|
||
Folie są właściwie samodzielnymi sekcjami posiadającymi tytuł i treść.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza specyficznych poleceń rozpoczynających nową folię, są to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dostarcza także lekko zmodyfikowane wersje powyższych środowisk o nazwach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortFoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortRotatefoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
różnice pomiędzy nimi są wyjaśnione w następnej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Folie są często używane do prezentacji pomysłów lub nowych teorii i także
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza szeroki wachlarz narzędzi do ich prezentacji:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{multicols}{2}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lemma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proposition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Definition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proof
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lemma*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proposition*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Definition*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{multicols}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wersje z gwiazdką są środowiskami nienumerowanymi, a bez gwiazdki są numerowane.
|
||
Są jeszcze dwa środowiska list dodane przez LyX i są to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TickList
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CrossList
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest jeszcze kilka poleceń
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-a, które nie są obsługiwane przez LyX.
|
||
Wspomnimy o nich i ich przeznaczeniu w sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:unsuppfoils"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Tworzenie folii
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji podamy proste wprowadzenie jak korzystać z różnych środowisk
|
||
aby utworzyć folię.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz zobaczyć przykład folii zobacz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Foils.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
dostępny z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
twórz\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
i naciśnij przycisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Strona tytułowa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nie tak jak inne klasy dostarczające środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy tytuł na własnej stronie.
|
||
Jeśli opuścisz środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to LaTeX w zastępstwie wstawi bieżącą datę (aktualizowaną przy każdym
|
||
podglądzie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozpoczęcie nowej folii
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jak wspomniałem wcześniej, mamy cztery sposoby na utworzenie nowej folii.
|
||
Dla folii pionowych powinieneś użyć
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortFoilhead.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Różnica pomiędzy tymi środowiskami polega na wielkości odstępu pomiędzy
|
||
tytułem a treścią.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Folie poziome tworzymy za pomocą środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortRotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Znów różnica miedzy nimi polega na odstępie pomiędzy tytułem a treścią.
|
||
W obu skróconych wersjach mamy o pół cala mniejszy odstęp.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jednym problemem z obsługą poziomych slajdów jest wymóg użycia sterownika
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
do utworzenia pliku PostScriptŽ, w przeciwnym razie folia nie zostanie
|
||
obrócona.
|
||
Jest możliwość uzyskania poziomych folii nawet jeśli nie masz programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
, po prostu musisz włożyć folie poziomo do drukarki;-)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Theorems, Lemmas, Proofs i więcej
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Z powodu małego błędu w LyX-ie nie można umieścić dwóch środowisk tego samego
|
||
typu bezpośrednio jedno po drugim.
|
||
Musza one być czymkolwiek rozdzielone.
|
||
Jeśli spróbujesz , będziesz mógł rozciągnąć poprzednie środowisko, tak
|
||
abyś miał połączone dwa środowiska razem.
|
||
A jak rozwiązać ten problem? Najprostszym rozwiązaniem jest wstawienie
|
||
tekstu pomiędzy dwa środowiska lub wstawienie wstawki
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
pomiędzy te środowiska zawierającej znak komentarza ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
To wymusi na LyX-ie utworzenie dwóch oddzielnych środowisk i da poprawny
|
||
wynik.
|
||
Przykład jest zawarty w dostarczonym pliku w dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
pamiętaj, problem pojawia się tylko jeśli próbujesz umieścić dwa środowiska
|
||
takie jak Theorem bezpośrednio jedno za drugim.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Listy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz korzystać ze wszystkich obsługiwanych i występujących w innych klasach,
|
||
środowisk list, a także z dwóch nowych.
|
||
Tutaj opiszę tylko te nowe.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz znaleźć więcej informacji o innych środowiskach list zajrzyj
|
||
do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli zamierzasz korzystać z wyliczeń powinieneś także przeczytać sekcję
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:bullet"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wybór znaku wyliczenia
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dwa nowe style list
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TickList
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CrossList
|
||
\family default
|
||
, zaprojektowano aby ułatwić Ci tworzenie list czynności wykonanych i nie
|
||
lub co jest w porządku lub złe, przez dostarczenie dedykowanych środowisk,
|
||
które używają haczyka (akceptacji) lub krzyżyka (negacji) jako znaku wyliczenia.
|
||
Te listy są w rzeczywistości dedykowanymi wariantami środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wymagają one jednak zainstalowanego pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
psnfss
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rysunki i Tabele
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX redefiniuje wstawki tabel i rysunków tak, aby pojawiły się dokładnie
|
||
w miejscu ich wystąpienia w tekście.
|
||
W rzeczywistości zmiany pozycji wstawki są ignorowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:foilfoot"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
Restriction{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
są przeznaczone do sterowania lewą stopką.
|
||
Pierwsze pozwala na dołączenie
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Aby dołączyć logo graficzne to należy jako argument polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
wpisać:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
includegraphics{nazwapliku}
|
||
\family default
|
||
oraz umieścić w preambule polecenie:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphicx}
|
||
\family default
|
||
albo
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
logo graficznego do folii, a domyślnie wpisuje ,,--Typeset by FoilTeX--''.
|
||
Drugie polecenie pozwala na wprowadzenie klasyfikacji dostępności, np.
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Poufne
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Domyślnie jest puste.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pozostałe narożniki można wypełnić poleceniami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Footer
|
||
\family default
|
||
(domyślnie numer folii),
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
(prawy górny) i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Left
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
(lewy górny).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nieobsługiwane funkcje
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:unsuppfoils"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie polecenia wyjaśnione poniżej należy wstawiać w środowisku
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub jako
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
wewnątrz innych środowisk.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Długości
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie długości są ustawiane poleceniem
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
lengthname
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
newlength
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
gdzie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
lengthname
|
||
\emph default
|
||
powinno być zastąpione nazwą długości, która chcesz zmienić, a
|
||
\emph on
|
||
newlength
|
||
\emph default
|
||
przez wartość.
|
||
Dla wszystkich długości należy podać jednostkę, np.
|
||
cale (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
in
|
||
\family default
|
||
), milimetry (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mm
|
||
\family default
|
||
) lub punkty (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pt
|
||
\family default
|
||
) lub jednostki względne w dokumencie lub długości odnoszące się do wielkości
|
||
czcionek takie jak
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Można zmieniać odstęp pomiędzy tytułem folii a treścią, przez zmianę długości
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
foilheadskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na przykład, aby na
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wszystkich
|
||
\emph default
|
||
foliach tytuły były bliżej treści o pół cala, to wpisz do preambuły:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
foilheadskip}{-0.5in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Odstępy wokół wstawek mogą być ustawiane przez zmianę następujących długości:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovefloatskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy tekstem a górą wstawki,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovecaptionskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy wstawką a podpisem,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
belowcaptionskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy podpisem a dalszym tekstem,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
captionwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
Możesz zadać węższy podpis wstawki niż otaczający tekst przez ustawienie
|
||
tej długości.
|
||
Najlepiej odnosić się do długości
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest jeszcze kilka długości związanymi ze strona tytułowa, które mogą być
|
||
użyteczne jeśli masz długie tytuły lub kilku autorów:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovetitleskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy nagłówkiem a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
titleauthorskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authorauthorskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy wielokrotnymi wierszami środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authordateskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
dateabstractskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostatnia długość odnosi się do wszystkich środowisk list.
|
||
Jeśli umieścisz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
zerolistvertdimens
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wewnątrz
|
||
\emph default
|
||
środowiska listy, wtedy wszystkie odstępy pionowe pomiędzy elementami listy
|
||
zostaną usunięte.
|
||
Uwaga -- to jest polecenie, a nie długość i nie wymaga
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength
|
||
\family default
|
||
tak jak wspomniane powyżej długości.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOn
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
sterują wyświetlaniem na danym slajdzie logo zdefiniowanym poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli wpiszesz polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
do preambuły, to wówczas na żadnej folii nie pojawi się logo.
|
||
Jeśli nie chcesz aby pojawiło się logo na jednej z folii, to umieść na
|
||
niej polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
tuż po tytule strony, a następnie umieść polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOn
|
||
\family default
|
||
po tytule następnej folii.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pozostałe polecenia sterujące:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rightfooter{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
prawa stopka, domyślnie zawiera numer strony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rightheader{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
prawy nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
leftheader{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
lewy nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli zdecydujesz się użyć styl strony
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancy
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, prawdopodobnie powinieneś dodać
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
headwidth
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
do preambuły, tak aby nagłówki i stopki były właściwie umieszczone na poziomych
|
||
stronach.
|
||
Jest to spowodowane niezgodnością układów stron dostarczanych przez pakiet
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancyheadings
|
||
\family default
|
||
i klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Latex8 (Dokumenty konferencyjne IEEE )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Since this class is specifically for writing submissions to IEEE sponsored
|
||
conferences I strongly recommend that you get a copy of their Authors Kit.
|
||
The
|
||
\family sans
|
||
latex.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
package and associated bibliography style file is included in the kit.
|
||
The Authors Kit is usually sent out by email once your initial submission
|
||
has been accepted.
|
||
There is a lot of useful information in the Authors Kit explaining formatting
|
||
restrictions and so on and I will assume you have read this since that
|
||
means I don't have to repeat it all here.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
[AR.
|
||
more to come]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Title
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Author
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
E-mail
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
SubSection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Różnice pomiędzy ekranem a dokumentem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are slight differences in appearance mainly with the presentation
|
||
of section counters.
|
||
On screen the trailing period of the section counter is missing but it
|
||
will appear in the output so don't let this worry you.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Hollywood (Hollywood spec scripts)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Garst Reese
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Getting the format of a Hollywood script right is a ,,rite of passage''.
|
||
Został zaprojektowany do czytania ze zwróceniem uwagi na treść oraz aby
|
||
być łatwym i przyjaznym w czytaniu dla aktorów.
|
||
Każda strona scenariusza powinna być jedną minutą filmu.
|
||
Nie pisz tego czego nie możesz zobaczyć lub usłyszeć na ekranie.
|
||
W całym dokumencie powinna być stosowana czcionka Courier 12pkt, bez kursywy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tekst mówcy nie powinien być NIGDY łamany w połowie zdania.
|
||
Jeśli tekst mówcy jest kontynuowany na następnej stronie, powtórz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Nazwę
|
||
\family default
|
||
mówcy przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Cont'd
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne funkcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstaw nazwę mówcy (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) jako etykietę, a dalej wykorzystuj ją przez odnośniki wewnętrzne.
|
||
Okno odnośników będzie wyświetlało obsadę.
|
||
Odnośniki możesz używać do wstawiania nazwy mówcy również w tekście narratora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Rozmiar papieru i marginesy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
USLetter, lewy 1.6in, prawy 0.75in, górny 0.5in, dolny 0.75in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dostępne są następujące środowiska.
|
||
Możesz użyć układu hollywood.bind aby uzyskać skróty klawiszowe jak poniżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Użyj gdzie nic innego nie pasuje.
|
||
Próbuj nie korzystać z niego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Narrative
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z n
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Used to describe stage setting and the action.
|
||
Pierwsze użycie nazwy aktora napisz kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
FADE
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
IN
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
M-z S-I
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Usually followed by something like ,,on Sally waking up''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
INT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z i
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Introduces a new INTERIOR camera set-up.
|
||
Always followed by DAY or NIGHT, or something similar to define the lighting
|
||
required.
|
||
Pisz zawsze dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EXT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z e
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Introduces a new EXTERIOR camera set-up.
|
||
Pisz zawsze dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z s
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
The character speaking.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Parenthetical
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z p
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcje dla mówcy.
|
||
Nawiasy ,,()'' są wstawiane automatycznie i wyświetlane są tylko w LyX-ie,
|
||
ale zawsze będa drukowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z d
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Co mówca (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) mówi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Transition
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z t
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcja przemieszczania dla kamery, np.
|
||
CUT TO:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
FADE
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
OUT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-I
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-A
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-T
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Address
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z r
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Żargon scenariusza
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
(O.S) --- off screen
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
(V.0) --- voice over
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
b.g.
|
||
--- tło
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
C.U.
|
||
--- close-up
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
PAN --- przesunięcie kamery
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
INSERT --- cut to close-up of
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Broadway
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Garst Reese
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa Broadway jest przeznaczona dla piszących scenariusze teatralne.
|
||
Ten format jest bardziej dekoracyjny i o wiele mniej ustandaryzowany.
|
||
Ten format powinien być odpowiedni dla workshopów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podobnie jak format Hollywood.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne funkcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstaw nazwę mówcy (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) jako etykietę, a dalej wykorzystuj ją przez odnośniki wewnętrzne.
|
||
Okno odnośników wewnętrznych będzie wyświetlać aktualną obsadę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Rozmiar papieru i marginesy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
USLetter, lewy 1.6in, prawy 0.75in, górny 0.5in, dolny 0.75in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dostępne są następujące środowiska.
|
||
Możesz użyć układu broadway.bind aby uzyskać skróty klawiszowe jak poniżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie powinieneś go używać, ale jest jeśli inne nie będą Ci odpowiadać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Narrative
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z n
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Used to describe stage setting and the action.
|
||
Pierwsze użycie nazwy aktora napisz kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ACT
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z a
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Automatycznie numerowane.
|
||
Na ekranie będzie numeracja liczbami arabskimi, a na wydruku rzymskimi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ACT*
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S at
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Podtytuł ACT.
|
||
\family default
|
||
Tekst jest centrowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
SCENE
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-S
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie jest numerowane automatycznie.
|
||
Ty podajesz numer.
|
||
This is because I couldn't figure out how.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
AT
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
RISE:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-R
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
A special case of Narrative to describe the setting and action as the curtain
|
||
rises.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z s
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nazwa mówcy (aktora), wyśrodkowana napisana będzie kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Parenthetical
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z p
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcje dla mówcy.
|
||
Nawiasy ,,()'' są wstawiane automatycznie, ale wyświetlane są tylko w LyX-ie,
|
||
ale zawsze będa drukowane.
|
||
To środowisko jest używane tylko wewnątrz środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z d
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Co mówi mówca.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CURTAIN
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-C
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Opuszczenie kurtyny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-T
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-A
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_Address
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z r
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Hello there.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
RevTeX4
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Amir Karge
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
współpracuje z klasą RevTeX 4.0 (wydanie
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\beta$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
z maja 1999 roku) American Physical Society.
|
||
LyX ma klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która współpracuje z RevTeX 3.1.
|
||
Jednak wersja 3.1 jest generalnie przestarzała jako współpracująca z LaTeX2.09,
|
||
co oznacza, że współpraca z LyX-em nie jest najlepsza., ponieważ LyX wymaga
|
||
LaTeX2e.
|
||
Since RevTeX 4.0 has been designed to work much more cleanly with LaTeX2e,
|
||
LyX with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
RevTeX
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
textclass should also be pretty easy to use.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These documents are supposed to be used in
|
||
\emph on
|
||
addition
|
||
\emph default
|
||
to the RevTeX 4.0 documents, so we don't describe any of the special RevTeX
|
||
macros, and assume you'll know what to put in the preamble if necessary.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Instalacja
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
All you need to do is install RevTeX 4, as described in the package's README
|
||
file.
|
||
the package can be found atThe RevTeX 4 Web Site
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Install it somewhere that LaTeX can see it.
|
||
Test it by trying to LaTeX a short RevTeX 4 document in some random directory
|
||
(i.e., not the directory where you installed the class file.) Then, if you
|
||
reconfigure LyX, it will find the class file and let you use the RevTeX4
|
||
textclass.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Probably the easiest way to get started is either to import a RevTeX 4 document
|
||
using
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, or to use the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
template, found in the templates directory.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Preambuła Matter
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Optional arguments to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
, like ,,preprint'' and ,,aps'', go in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tra Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
field in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup, as usual.
|
||
Remember that in RevTeX, at least one optional argument is required!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Other preamble matter, like
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
draft
|
||
\family default
|
||
etc.
|
||
goes in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Latex Preamble
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup, also as usual.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Układ
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The layouts basically correspond to the commands in RevTeX4.0.
|
||
For example, the Email layout corresponds to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Note that (at least as of RevTeX 4.0 Beta), the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
layouts are exactly equivalent, so you shouldn't need to use both.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
In case you're curious, both were included so that
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
would be able to translate both
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
address
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Ważne uwagi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a couple of important unique aspects of RevTeX 4 which might cause
|
||
bugs that will be even more confusing in LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In RevTeX, the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
command goes
|
||
\emph on
|
||
outside
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
author
|
||
\family default
|
||
command.
|
||
The LyX equivalent is that there is a separate Thanks layout.
|
||
Do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
not
|
||
\emph default
|
||
write footnotes in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
layout, or weird things may happen.
|
||
See the RevTeX 4 documentation for more details.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Also, the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Email
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
URL
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
layouts must be placed
|
||
\emph on
|
||
in between
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
layout and the corresponding
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
(or equivalent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
) layout.
|
||
If you put the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
after the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
, the LaTeX won't compile.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Drawbacks
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The main problem with this layout is that you can't use the optional arguments
|
||
to layouts like Email and Title.
|
||
(The problem is not unique to this layout; in LyX 1.0, you can't use optional
|
||
arguments to the Section layouts.) This means that after you export that
|
||
file to LaTeX (which you'll need to do eventually to send it in to APS),
|
||
you'll need to edit the LaTeX file with a text editor to add the optional
|
||
arguments to set, e.g., the running title for the page headers.
|
||
Lacking these layouts makes the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
(and the equivalent
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
) useless, so the corresponding layouts don't exist, and will have to be
|
||
added by hand.
|
||
This drawback will be fixed in LyX 1.2.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
article (mwart), book (mwbk) i report (mwrep)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (mwart)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (mwrep)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (mwbk)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
autorstwa marcina Wolińskiego odpowiadają klasom LateX-a odpowiednio:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwart.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwbk.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwrep.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zastępują one standardowe klasy:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
article.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
book.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
report.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Są one zgodne z polskimi zwyczajami typograficznymi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podstawowe różnice:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nienumerowane tytularia ( z gwiazdką) są dopisywane do spisu treści.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dodatkowe style strony:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
uheadings pagina górna z linią oddzielającą,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
myheadings pagina górna z zadawaną treścią poleceniami:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markright
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markboth
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
myuheadings pagina górna z zadawaną treścią z linią oddzielającą,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
outer paginacja w stopce od strony zewnętrznego marginesu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Opcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
rmheadings szeryfowe tytularia -- opcja domyślna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
sfheadings bezszeryfowe tytularia
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
authortitle najpierw autor poniżej tytuł -- opcja domyślna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
titleauthor najpierw tytuł poniżej autor
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
withmarginpar rezerwuje miejsce na marginalia
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Import i eksport innych formatów plików
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zagadnienie importu i eksportu z/do innych formatów plików zostało wspomniane
|
||
w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
W tym rozdziale jest opisane więcej szczegółów potrzebnych do zrozumienia
|
||
tego co się dzieje po naciśnięciu polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
mportuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
portuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Import z innych formatów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Translating from LaTeX into LyX is performed by a converter program called
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
Ponadto jest to samodzielny program, który może być wywoływany z wiersza
|
||
poleceń.
|
||
LyX wywołuje go automatycznie podczas importu pliku LaTeX-a.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:Importowanie-plików-LaTeX-a"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
dla pełniejszego opisu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
ASCII
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Są dwie metody importu plików tekstowych ASCII.
|
||
Import ,,jako wiersze'' zachowuje wszystkie końce wierszy z pliku ASCII
|
||
do LyX-a, wówczas każdy wiersz jest oddzielnym akapitem.
|
||
Podczas importu ,,jako akapit'' kolejne wiersze łączone są w jeden akapit.
|
||
Pusty wiersz traktowany jest jako separator akapitów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Noweb
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
[Editor's note: Needs to be written, obviously - any volunteers? --- mer]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Eksport do innych formatów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX tworzy dwa typy plików LaTeX-owych: pliki do normalnego przetwarzania
|
||
(do podglądu DVI itp.), które nie są nigdy oglądane oraz pliki o formie
|
||
czytelnej dla ludzi.
|
||
Jedyną możliwą do ustawienia jest dyrektywa
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ascii_linelen
|
||
\family default
|
||
określająca maksymalną długość wiersza pliku, domyślną wartością jest 75
|
||
znaków.
|
||
Plik wynikowy jest poprawnym plikiem LaTeX-a, lecz preambuła może wyglądać
|
||
trochę przerażająco ponieważ zawiera kilka definicji używanych przez LyX-a,
|
||
które nie wyglądają na utworzone przez człowieka.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Plik DVI (skrót od
|
||
\family sans
|
||
D
|
||
\family default
|
||
e
|
||
\family sans
|
||
V
|
||
\family default
|
||
ice
|
||
\family sans
|
||
I
|
||
\family default
|
||
ndependent -- ,,sprzętowo niezależne'') są tworzone podczas przetwarzania
|
||
Twojego dokumentu przez LaTeX.
|
||
Nie ma żadnych opcji do ustawienia przez użytkownika.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
PostScript
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następny krokiem w łańcuchu konwersji jest konwersja pliku DVI do PostScript.
|
||
Najczęściej używanym do tego celu programem jest program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wybrany program należy podać w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
print_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Argumenty wiersza poleceń, np.
|
||
dla dvips polecenia druku w odwrotnej kolejności (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-r
|
||
\family default
|
||
) można podać w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
print_extra_options
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
ASCII
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Eksport do ASCII próbuje zachować ,,kształt'' dokumentu jak to możliwe,
|
||
ale takie elementy jak centrowanie i wcięcia są odrzucane, a akapity są
|
||
rozdzielane pustym wierszem.
|
||
Numeracja sekcji i odnośników jest wykonana poprawnie, tak że w efekcie
|
||
plik jest dość przejrzysty.
|
||
Jedyną możliwą do ustawienia jest dyrektywa
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ascii_linelen
|
||
\family default
|
||
określająca maksymalną długość wiersza pliku ASCII.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
HTML
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dokumenty LyX-a mogą być konwertowane do formatu hipertekstowego, zwykle
|
||
najpierw dokonywana jest konwersja do LaTeX-a, który konwertuje do formatu
|
||
HTML.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aktualnie są dostępne dla LyX-a trzy konwertery LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
HTML:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tth
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
latex2html
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
hevea
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Są one wykrywane automatycznie, jednak można wymusić wybór jednego z nich
|
||
dyrektywą w pliku konfiguracyjnym
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
html_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W tej dyrektywie można także dołączyć argumenty wiersza poleceń.
|
||
Czytaj komentarze w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które zawierają najbardziej aktualne informacje dotyczące szczegółów użycia
|
||
poszczególnych dyrektyw.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Dekel Tsur
|
||
\noun default
|
||
(mostly)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najszybszą drogą do tworzenia plików PDF (bez znaczników, linków itp.) w
|
||
dowolnej wersji LyX-a jest zapisanie dokumentu w formacie PostScript, a
|
||
następnie uruchomienie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ps2pdf
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Począwszy od wersji 1.1.6 dostępna jest pozycja menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Exportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
PDF
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Od wersji 1.1.6 jest to najlepsza droga do uzyskania porządnych plików PDF.
|
||
Jest trochę kłopotów z czcionkami, na które powinieneś uważać -- zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:badfonts"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie pdfLaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Korzystając z pdfLaTeX potrzebujesz skonwertować swoje obrazki EPS do formatu
|
||
PDF (zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:pdfeps"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
) i nie możesz używać pstricks.
|
||
Z drugiej strony, korzystając z pdfLaTeX można wstawiać wprost rysunki
|
||
w formatach JPEG lub PNG, używać czcionek TrueType i wiele innych.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dlaczego tekst wygląda mało czytelnie przy podglądzie za pomocą Acrobat
|
||
Reader?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:badfonts"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Źródłem kłopotów są czcionki bitmapowe brzydko wyświetlane przez Acrobat
|
||
Reader.
|
||
Podczas tworzenia pliku PDF z pliku LyX-a potrzebujesz czcionek obwiedniowych
|
||
zamiast bitmapowych (w rzeczywistości powinieneś także używać czcionek
|
||
obwiedniowych w plikach postscriptowych).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostatnie dystrybucje LaTeX-a posiadają standardowe czcionki CM (Computer
|
||
Modern) PostScript Type 1.
|
||
PdfLaTeX używa tych czcionek domyślnie.
|
||
Dvips nie używa ich domyślnie, dla ich użycia należy dopisać do pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.dvipsrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
następujące wiersze
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
p+ psfonts.cmz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
p+ psfonts.amz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli używane jest domyślne kodowanie LaTeX-a (OT1), to nie trzeba robić
|
||
nic więcej.
|
||
Ale jeśli używane jest kodowanie T1 to LaTeX używa nowych czcionek EC,
|
||
dla których nie ma wersji Type1.
|
||
Rozwiązaniem jest użycie pakietu ae, który emuluje kodowanie T1 używając
|
||
czcionek CM.
|
||
Należy wówczas w preambule dopisać
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{ae,aecompl}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jednak niektórych znaków brakuje w czcionkach CM (np.
|
||
eth, thorn) i są one pobierane z czcionek EC.
|
||
Dlatego pobierane są znaki jako bitmapy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: LyX używa domyślnie kodowania T1.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz stosować domyślne kodowanie (co nie jest zalecane chyba że
|
||
piszesz tylko w języku angielskim), dodaj wiersz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
font_encoding default
|
||
\family default
|
||
do pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.lyx/lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dla składu w języku polskim zaleca się stosować kodowanie OT4 oraz pakiet
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
polski
|
||
\family default
|
||
zamiast pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
babel
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
polski
|
||
\family default
|
||
włącza spolonizowane czcionki CM w układzie OT4 zwane czcionkami PL.
|
||
Czcionki PL występują również w wersji obwiedniowej co rozwiązuje problemy
|
||
z Acrobat Readerem.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Alternatywą jest użycie standardowych czcionek postscriptowych zamiast
|
||
czcionek CM.
|
||
Do tego potrzebujesz wybrać pslatex jako globalną czcionkę w oknie układu
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
Gdy używamy czcionek postsciptowych to pliki PDF są mniejsze o czcionki
|
||
nie dołączone do pliku.
|
||
Ponadto czcionki postscriptowe dołączają wszystkie krzywe T1.
|
||
Z drugiej zaś strony czcionki postscriptowe nie posiadają półgrubych czcionek
|
||
symboli i muszą być użyte pmb (poor man's bold, zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:pdfbold"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Czcionki postscriptowe także wyglądają inaczej z zestawu czcionek CM.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podsumowując czcionki postscriptowe i Computer Modern dają dobre rezultaty
|
||
(z kilkoma wyjątkami).
|
||
Decyzja których używać jest kwestią gustu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Jak mogę użyć pdfLaTeX z obrazkami w formacie EPS?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:pdfeps"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
PdfLaTeX nie obsługuje włączania plików EPS, ale obsługuje włączanie plików
|
||
PDF.
|
||
Jeśli masz dokumenty z włączonymi rysunkami EPS, np.
|
||
plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to powinieneś:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Skonwertuj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
do PDF za pomocą
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
epstopdf foo.eps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Kiedy wstawiasz rysunek w dokumencie nie podawaj rozszerzenia nazwy pliku:
|
||
na przykład, wstawiając plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
wystarczy wpisać tylko
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie dialogowym.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: W LyX 1.2.0 będzie możliwe wstawianie różnych rodzajów rysunków ze
|
||
wszystkimi niezbędnymi transformacjami.
|
||
Częściowo funkcjonalne wstawianie istnieje w wersji 1.1.6, do użycia należy
|
||
wpisać
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
M-x graphics-insert
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dlaczego polecenie
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol{} nie działa gdy używam pslatex?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:pdfbold"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Czcionki PostScript nie posiadają symboli półgrubych.
|
||
Rozwiązaniem jest użycie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(poor man's bold).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest to możliwe przez przedefiniowanie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol
|
||
\family default
|
||
do użycia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb
|
||
\family default
|
||
przez:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol}[1]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb{#1}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
w preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Czy jest możliwe zapisanie kodu przetwarzanego tylko przez pdfLaTeX-a?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tak.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newif
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifpdf
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifx
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfoutput
|
||
\backslash
|
||
undefined
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdffalse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
else
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdftrue
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifpdf
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfinfo { /Author (your name and e-mail address)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
/Title (official title -- i.e., title element)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
/Subject (one line description of the document)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfcatalog { /PageMode (/UseNone)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% /OpenAction (fitbh)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
else
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage[ps2pdf]{hyperref}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Eksport użytkownika
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Eksport użytkownika jest możliwy jeśli masz dziwny format do którego chcesz
|
||
konwertować, zakładając, że masz odpowiedni konwerter.
|
||
Format pliku wejściowego jest podany w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
custom_export_format
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX będzie automatycznie konwertował plik do tego miejsca, a wtedy zostanie
|
||
on przekazany do Twojego konwertera.
|
||
Możliwymi wartościami są:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ascii
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie wywołania konwertera jest podane w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
custom_export_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To powinno być kompletne polecenie wiersza poleceń, które wykorzystuje
|
||
zmienną środowiska
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FNAME
|
||
\family default
|
||
do przekazania nazwy pliku głównego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Może będziesz musiał trochę poprawić podaną sekwencję, dla zgodności z twoją
|
||
powłoką.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Omawiany sposób eksportu ustawia się w domyślnym lokalnym pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Gdy wybierzesz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ustom
|
||
\family default
|
||
, pojawi się okno, w którym można zmienić dowolną wartość.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Funkcje LyX-a wymagające zewnętrznych programów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Faksowanie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Jürgen Vigna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wysyłanie faksów wprost z LyX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przede wszystkim musimy wspomnieć, że LyX potrafi wysyłać faksy pod warunkiem,
|
||
że masz zainstalowane i działające oprogramowanie do wysyłania faksów (np.
|
||
HylaFax, efax, mgetty+sendfax, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
).
|
||
LyX pracuje tylko jako graficzny interfejs (front end) do tych programów!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W zależności od używanego oprogramowania faksowego musisz ustawić kilka
|
||
poleceń w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Oto te polecenia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_command:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Tutaj należy podać polecenie, które ma wywołać LyX aby wysłać faks.
|
||
Polecenie powinno być zdolne przetworzyć plik PostScript, wytworzony przez
|
||
LyX-a.
|
||
Łańcuch polecenia może zawierać następujące zmienne:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Host:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje nazwę zmiennej środowiska FAX_SERVER
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Comment:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola komentarz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Enterprise:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola Firma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Name:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola nazwa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Phone:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola numer faksu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FName:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje nazwę pliku, który ma zostać wysłany
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przyjmujemy, że nazwałeś plik ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
newfile.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i chciałbyś wysłać go wprost do faksu nie opuszczając LyX-a.
|
||
Masz zainstalowane oprogramowanie HylaFax i twoja zmienna środowiska
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
FAX_SERVER
|
||
\family default
|
||
ma wartość ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
faxhost.mydomain
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i podałeś te wartości w oknie faksowania:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Fax.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
no:
|
||
\family default
|
||
+39-2-444666
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dest.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Name:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Someone
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enterprise:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Startrek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment:
|
||
\family default
|
||
This comment string
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Z podanymi niżej ustawieniami:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
sendfax -n -h '$$Host' -c '$$Comment'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-x '$$Enterprise' -d '$$Name'@'$$Phone' '$$FName'
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zostanie wykonane polecenie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
sendfax -n -h faxhost.mydomain -c 'This comment string'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-x 'Startrek' -d 'Someone'@'+39-2-444666'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
<tempfile-path>/newfile.ps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Zawiera nazwę pliku książki telefonicznej, którą możesz utworzyć w oknie
|
||
formularza faksu.
|
||
Domyślną wartością jest
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$HOME/.lyx/phonebook.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book myphonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zapisuje i czyta plik książki telefonicznej z pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$HOME/.lyx/myphonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book /var/lib/phonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zapisuje i czyta plik książki telefonicznej
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/var/lib/phonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_program:
|
||
\family default
|
||
W tym miejscu podajesz program, który LyX wywoła jako zewnętrzny program
|
||
do wysłania Twojego faksu (np.
|
||
tkhylafax), zamiast wbudowanego formularza faksu.
|
||
Dopuszczalna jest tylko zmienna
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FName
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tkhylafax '$$Fname'
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przy powyższych założeniach zostanie wykonane następujące polecenie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
tkhylafax <tempfile-path>/newfile.ps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Check TeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by Asger
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Alstrup
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Edycja
|
||
\family default
|
||
możesz znaleźć polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C
|
||
\bar under
|
||
h
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eck
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ta funkcja LyX-a wymaga posiadania zainstalowanego zewnętrznego programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
i jest wygaszone jeśli go nie posiadasz.
|
||
Możesz go pobrać z archiwów CTAN lub z
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.ifi.uio.no/~jensthi/chktex/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest programem napisanym przez sfrustrowanego
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Jens T.
|
||
Berger Thielemann
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, ponieważ wiele konstrukcji LaTeX-a czasami jest nieintuicyjnych i łatwych
|
||
do zapomnienia.
|
||
Program przetwarzając Twój plik LaTeX-a sprawdza integralność pliku i zaznacza
|
||
błędy.
|
||
W języku technicznym jest to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Lint
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Czy CheckTeX jest kontrolerem składni, którego użycie zapewni poprawne pliki
|
||
LateX-a? Odpowiedź jest prosta: Tak jak
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Lint
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie tylko sprawdza składnię programów w języku C, semantykę, wyłapuje wiele
|
||
typowych błędów typograficznych.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
potrafi wykryć wiele podstawowych błędów, takich jak:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Ellipsis detection:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Use \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
instead of ...
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
No space in front of/after parenthesis:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
( wrong spacing )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Enforcement of normal space after common abbreviations:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
e.
|
||
g.
|
||
is too wide spacing.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Enforcement of end-of-sentence space when the last sentence ends with a
|
||
capital letter:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is a TEST.
|
||
And this is wrong spacing.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Space in front of labels and similar commands:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
The label should stick right up to the text to avoid falling to a wrong
|
||
page.
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:chktex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
This footnote is in danger of falling off to a wrong page
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Space in front of references, instead of hard spaces:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
In you are in bad luck, the text will break right between the referenced
|
||
text and reference number, and that's a pity.
|
||
See section
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:chktex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Use of ,,x'' instead of
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
between numbers:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
2x2 looks cheap compared to
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $2\times2$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
i inne \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
To jest nieocenione narzędzie gdy ,,zakończyliśmy'' pracę nad dokumentem.
|
||
Przed wydrukowaniem powinniśmy sprawdzić obligatoryjnie pisownię i uruchomić
|
||
CheckTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak użyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli masz zainstalowany program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
checktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, po prostu wybierz z menu polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
C
|
||
\bar under
|
||
h
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eck TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To spowoduje utworzenie pliku LaTeX-a na podstawie Twojego dokumentu, sprawdzen
|
||
ie go przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wstawienie ,,okienek błędów'' do dokumentu z ostrzeżeniami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jeśli jakieś znalazł.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia zostaną umieszczone blisko miejsca wystąpienia błędu, które
|
||
możesz szybko odnaleźć za pomocą polecenia z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Błąd
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub za pomocą skótu klawiszowego
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-g
|
||
\family default
|
||
w domyślnym pliku bind
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cua
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Okienko błędu otwiera się przez kliknięcie na nim myszką lub domyślnym
|
||
skrótem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-i
|
||
\family default
|
||
albo skrótem z pliku bind
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
emacs
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-o
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przeczytaj uwagi i popraw błędy jeśli są.
|
||
Jeśli masz kłopoty ze zrozumieniem co oznaczają ostrzeżenia, możesz spokojnie
|
||
je zignorować.
|
||
Remember that there is a hidden layer between the document on screen and
|
||
the technical details in invoking
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and this gap can make some warnings seem arcane or just right down plain
|
||
silly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This document is an excellent testing bed for the feature, and it should
|
||
provide quite a few warnings for you to fiddle with.
|
||
Since computers are only so smart, expect most of the warnings to be false
|
||
alarms, though.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak dopasować
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Sometimes, you'll find that
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
makes more noise than suits your mood.
|
||
Then you can choose not to use it, wait until your mood changes, or try
|
||
to customize
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
to get better along with you.
|
||
Another choice in the most desperate situations is to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
suń wszystkie okienka błędów
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which will get rid of all warnings instantly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mimo to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
jest
|
||
\emph default
|
||
bardzo konfigurowalny i extensible, nie powinieneś spodziewać się rozwiązania
|
||
wszystkich problemów przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
w LyX-ie tą drogą.
|
||
Since LyX has to generate a somewhat special LaTeX file to be able to match
|
||
the line numbers from
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
output
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
You can inspect the specific output from
|
||
\family sans
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
by using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
View
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Log
|
||
\family default
|
||
right after a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
run.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to appear correctly.
|
||
Są dwie rzeczy, które możesz wykonać :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dopasuj polecenia wywołania
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
w swoim pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub w globalnym pliku konfiguracyjnym instalacji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
(zwykle jest to plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/local/share/chktexrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Zobacz poniżej jak można włączać i wyłączać ostrzeżenia w wierszu poleceń.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wyeksportuj swoj dokument do LaTeX-a za pomocą polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
i uruchom
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
ręcznie.
|
||
Invoked in this way, it can be a hassle to find the corresponding place
|
||
in the document inside LyX, but with a little patience, you should be able
|
||
to do it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Poniższe komunikaty ostrzeżeń mogą być aktywowane lub wyłączone za pomocą
|
||
odpowiednich wpisów w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chktex_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
w Twoim pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Użyj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-n#
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby wyłączyć ostrzeżenie i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-w#
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby je uaktywnić.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia napisane kursywą są domyślnie wyłączone, przez domyślny wpis
|
||
w dyrektywie "
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex -n1 -n3 -n6 -n9 -n22 -n25 -n30 -n38
|
||
\family default
|
||
".
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Notice that you should only use the options that enable and disable warnings,
|
||
because LyX relies on some of the other command line parameters to be set
|
||
in a specific way to have a chance to communicate with
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Command terminated with space.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Non-breaking space (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should have been used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You should enclose the previous parenthesis with ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found in non-italic buffer.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found more than once.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
No italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Accent command ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' needs use of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Wrong length of dash may have been used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' expected, found ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Solo ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' to achieve an ellipsis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Inter-word spacing (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should perhaps be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Inter-sentence spacing (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should perhaps be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Could not find argument for command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
No match found for ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Math mode still on at end of LaTeX file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Number of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
char
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' doesn't match the number of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
char
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use either
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\family default
|
||
as an alternative to ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
"
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (ASCII 39) instead of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
´
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (ASCII 180).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
User-specified pattern found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
This command might not be intended.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Comment displayed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Either
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\backslash
|
||
,'
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\backslash
|
||
,''
|
||
\family default
|
||
will look better.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Delete this space to maintain correct page references.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You might wish to put this between a pair of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You ought to remove spaces in front of punctuation.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Could not execute LaTeX command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Don't use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
in front of small punctuation.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\size small
|
||
$
|
||
\backslash
|
||
times$
|
||
\family default
|
||
may look prettier here.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Multiple spaces detected in output.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
This text may be ignored.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,
|
||
\family default
|
||
to begin quotation, not '.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\family default
|
||
to end quotation, not
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Don't mix quotes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should perhaps use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' instead.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should put a space in front of/after parenthesis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should avoid spaces in front of/after parenthesis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You should not use punctuation in front of/after quotes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Double space found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should put punctuation outside inner/inside display math mode.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You ought to not use primitive TeX in LaTeX code.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should remove spaces in front of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' is normally not followed by ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%c
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mam nadzieję, że w następnych wersjach LyX-a dostarczymy bardziej kompletny
|
||
interfejs dla tego narzędzia (i jego mniejszego kuzyna
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lacheck
|
||
\family default
|
||
) dla wykorzystania jego pełnych możliwości.
|
||
But it's not exactly useless as it is now: go try it on one of your existing
|
||
documents of a certain length and be surprised.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Kontrola wersji (RCS) w LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Lars Gullik Bjřnnes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Moi przyjaciele chcieli użyć LyX-a do projektu grupowego.
|
||
Gdy nie znaleźli obsługi kontroli wersji ani blokowania plików, porzucili
|
||
ten pomysł.
|
||
To na tyle mnie zirytowało, że postanowiłem zrobić obsługę dla RCS (z możliwośc
|
||
ią obsługi CVS i/lub SCCS jako przyszłościowe ulepszenie).
|
||
To już zostało zrobione i teraz LyX obsługuje najbardziej podstawowe polecenia
|
||
RCS.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz zrobić coś bardziej wyszukanego to będziesz musiał zrobić
|
||
to ręcznie w terminalu xterm.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zanim zaczniesz używać kontroli wersji w LyX-ie powinieneś wpierw przeczytać
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
rcsintro
|
||
\emph default
|
||
(plik man:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
man rcsintro
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
W tym pliku są opisane wszystkie podstawowe funkcje RCS.
|
||
Powinieneś zwrócić szczególną uwagę na katalog RCS oraz na plik główny
|
||
RCS (zakończony v)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W LyX-ie dokonano implementacji dla ostatniej wersji pakietu GNU RCS --
|
||
nie gwarantujemy wykonania dla starszych wersji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Polecenia RCS w LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W dalszych sekcjach opisano polecenia RCS obsługiwane przez LyX-a.
|
||
Możesz je znaleźć w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ontrola wersji
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rejestruj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli dokument nie jest objęty kontrolą wersji, to wyświetlone jest tylko
|
||
to polecenie menu.
|
||
A jeśli dokument jest objęty kontrolą wersji, to te polecenie jest wyłączone.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To polecenie rejestruje dokument w RCS.
|
||
Zostaniesz zapytany o początkowy opis dokumentu.
|
||
Dokument jest teraz w trybie TylkoDoOdczytu i aby dokonać jego edycji musisz
|
||
wybrać polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Odblokuj i edytuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dokument objęty kontrolą wersji ma oznaczenie w buforze: [RCS:<version>
|
||
<locker>].
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ci -q -u -i -t-"<initial description>" <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przeczytaj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
man ci
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby poznać parametry wywołania polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Zwolnij
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy skończyłeś edycję pliku wprowadź zmianę do RCS.
|
||
Gdy to zrobisz, zostaniesz zapytany o opis zmian, który zostanie zapisany
|
||
w historii dokumentu.
|
||
Numer wersji zostanie zwiększony, a twoje zmiany dopisane do głównego pliku
|
||
RCS.
|
||
Dokument jest odblokowany i ustawiony w tryb TylkoDoOdczytu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ci -q -u -m"<description>" <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Zablokuj i edytuj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Za pomocą tego polecenia blokujemy dokument dla siebie i możemy go edytować.
|
||
Polecenie ustawia plik w tryb ZapisOdczyt tylko dla Ciebie.
|
||
Możesz kontynuować edycję do czasu, aż do wydania polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Zwolnij
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W wierszu statusowym zaznaczone jest że plik został zablokowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
co -q -l <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Wróć do ostatniej wersji
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie usuwa wszystkie wprowadzone zmiany do dokumentu od czasu ostatniej
|
||
rewizji (zwolnienia).
|
||
Zostaniesz przedtem ostrzeżony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
RCS command:is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
co -f -u<version> <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Usuń ostatnio wprowadzone zmiany
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wynikiem polecenia jest jak gdyby ostatnia rewizja się nie zdarzyła.
|
||
W dokumencie LyX-a nie są dokonywane żadne zmiany, ale ostatnia wersja
|
||
jest usuwana z głównego pliku RCS.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
RCS command:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rcs -o<version> <file-name>
|
||
\family default
|
||
umum
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Pokaż historię zmian
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie wyświetla pełną historię dokumentu.
|
||
Wyświetlony zostaje
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rlog <file-name>
|
||
\family default
|
||
w przeglądarce.
|
||
Przeczytaj man
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rlog
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby poznać więcej informacji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
By
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Edmar Wienskoski Jr.
|
||
|
||
\noun default
|
||
(edmar-w-jr@technologist.com)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The main purpose of this documentation is to show you how to use LyX for
|
||
literate programming.
|
||
Where it is assumed that you are familiar with this programming technique,
|
||
and know what
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tangling
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
weaving
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
means.
|
||
If that is not the case, please follow the web links provided in the following
|
||
sections.
|
||
There is a lot of good documentation out there covering old development
|
||
history to the latest tools tips.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
It is also assumed that you are familiar with LyX itself to a point that
|
||
you are comfortable changing your
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
file, and X resources file.
|
||
If that is not the case please refer to other LyX documentation to cover
|
||
your specific needs.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
From the Literate Programming FAQ :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
Literate programming is the combination of documentation and source together
|
||
in a fashion suited for reading by human beings.
|
||
In fact, literate programs should be enjoyable reading, even inviting!
|
||
(Sorry Bob, I couldn't resist!) In general, literate programs combine source
|
||
and documentation in a single file.
|
||
Literate programming tools then parse the file to produce either readable
|
||
documentation or compilable source.
|
||
The WEB style of literate programming was created by D.E.
|
||
Knuth during the development of his TeX typesetting software.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Another excerpt says:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
How is literate programming different from verbose commenting?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
There are three distinguishing characteristics.
|
||
In order of importance, they are:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
flexible order of elaboration
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
automatic support for browsing
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
typeset documentation, especially diagrams and mathematics
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Now that I sparked your curiosity, take a look in the references.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
References
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The complete Literate Programming FAQ can be found at:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
http://shelob.ce.ttu.edu/daves/faq.html
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The FAQ lists 23 (twenty three !) different literate programming tools.
|
||
Where some are specialized or
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tailored
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
for particular programming languages, while other have general scope.
|
||
I selected
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Noweb
|
||
\noun default
|
||
for my own use for several reasons:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It can generate the documentation either in latex or html.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It has a open architecture, i.e., it is easy to plug in new filters and to
|
||
perform special processing that you may need.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
There is a good selection of filters available already (the html is one
|
||
of them).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It is free.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The Noweb web page can be found at:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
http://www.cs.virginia.edu/~nr/noweb
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Starting from there you can reach many other interesting links and even
|
||
some literate program examples.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LyX and Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Some changes to LyX were required to enable it to interact with Noweb.
|
||
Those changes were rather simple, and were done in a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Noweb independent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
way, i.e., I expect that you will be able to use this new LyX feature with
|
||
some other literate programming tool of your choice by just re-configuring
|
||
your lyxrc file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Generowanie dokumentów i kodu (weaving and tangling)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Wybor klasy dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you have installed Noweb and LyX successfully, whenever you open a new
|
||
document or try to change the document class of an existing one, you will
|
||
find that there are three new document classes available:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Article (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Book (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Report (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You must select one of them to create your literate documents from.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note that literate documents are not limited to these three classes.
|
||
New classes can be generated from other styles like letter or in combination
|
||
with other class variations like Article (AMS).
|
||
I have limited the choice to these three because I didn't want to clog
|
||
the list of options with all possible variations.
|
||
If you have special needs that cannot be covered by one of the existing
|
||
classes, let me know and I will arrange to insert a new entry, or teach
|
||
you how to do it.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It is very simple, it involves the creation of a file with four lines, and
|
||
re-running of the auto configuration.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
a new set of document classes for it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Wpisywanie kodu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX enables you to write code with a layout named
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Scrap
|
||
\noun default
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The equivalent Noweb term is
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Chunk
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
For historical reasons, I got used to the term
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
scrap
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
introduced by other literate tool named Nuweb, which I used for many years
|
||
before rendering myself to Noweb.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
<<My scrap>>=
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
more code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
even more code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
@
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The problem is that whatever is written in between the << and the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
must be taken literally, i.e., LyX should be prevented from making any special
|
||
interpretation of what has been written.
|
||
For that reason, I defined a new layout named Scrap, that works like a
|
||
LaTeX paragraph but has a free spacing capability.
|
||
In other words, it is a combination of the LaTeX and the LyX-Code layouts.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The down side of this
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
semi-hack
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
is that consecutive paragraphs of code will be spaced with one empty line
|
||
in the source code and also in the printed documentation.
|
||
Of course I don't want this.
|
||
The work around is to enter each line of code within a single Scrap, with
|
||
a newline (ctrl-return).
|
||
The example above will look like this:
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
If you have a printed version of this document you will not see any difference
|
||
between the previous example and this one.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<<My scrap>>=
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
more code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
even more code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
@
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This layout works fine.
|
||
The only real inconvenience is that you have to type ctrl-return instead
|
||
of a plain return.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It is in my list of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
improvements
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to fix that.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
e to enter a blank character.
|
||
I believe these problems are a small price to pay for the benefits LyX
|
||
brings to you for typing, compiling, and debugging your literate program.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Generowanie dokumentacji
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
At this point you already have a new document file with a proper document
|
||
class, and with some code and text on it.
|
||
How do I print it ? The answer is simple, you select ,,Update dvi'' or
|
||
,,Update PostScript'' or ,,View dvi'', etc.
|
||
Just like you would do for a plain document.
|
||
No special procedure is required.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To help orientate you, I will now explain what happens inside LyX:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
When the ,,Update dvi'' menu option is chosen, a latex file is generated.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If the document is of any literate class the generated file will be named
|
||
with an extension name defined by
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
, otherwise the file will have the usual
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
extension.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Note that the only difference so far is in the name of the file, no special
|
||
processing is required by LyX.
|
||
Given that you formatted the code using the Scrap layout that, by itself,
|
||
takes care of the business.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
If the document is of any literate class LyX will execute:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
>
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.out
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.out >
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.log
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otherwise it will just skip this step.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Finally, LaTeX is invoked and the regular post processing continues as in
|
||
a plain document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
is to transform the newly created
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.nw
|
||
\family default
|
||
file into a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
command is to help LyX display error boxes when the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
reports any errors.
|
||
This filter can be a C program, a script, or any thing you want.
|
||
Its job is to identify error messages from your literate tool, in our case
|
||
Noweb, and convert them to a common format that LyX understands.
|
||
A separate document,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, in the examples directory (accessed with the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
button in the file popup), has a literate C program that can be used to
|
||
parse Noweb error messages.
|
||
This scheme introduces one more command for the user to configure, but
|
||
has the advantage of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
literate tool
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
independence.
|
||
Moreover, if you don't bother to set it, you can still use the system,
|
||
you just loose the ability to have a nice display and interaction with
|
||
the error messages.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Generowanie kodu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When the ,,Build Program'' File menu option is chosen or the corresponding
|
||
button in the toolbar is pressed, a latex file with extension
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
is generated just like step 1 above.
|
||
Then LyX invokes
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
to generate the code and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
to process the compilation error messages, as in step 3 above.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note that no special processing is required from LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Also note that I am assuming that you are familiar with Noweb.
|
||
In this case you will know what to do to get an executable file starting
|
||
from a noweb file (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.nw
|
||
\family default
|
||
extension).
|
||
It is likely that you will create a makefile for that purpose.
|
||
For that reason, after LyX creates the noweb file, it invokes the command
|
||
defined by
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_program
|
||
\family default
|
||
, with a default of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
make
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
In case you want to process your literate file with a script, or some other
|
||
program, just insert in your lyxrc file an entry with:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
my_script my_arguments
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
differs from the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
only in that the former will identify error messages from your compiler.
|
||
The same example program mentioned before can also parse gcc, or xlc error
|
||
messages.
|
||
If you have a different compiler you may want to change this program or
|
||
create a new one.
|
||
Again, the same comments from the previous section are valid here: this
|
||
is optional, you can skip it if you can afford to loose the LyX error handling
|
||
feature.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In summary, the ,,Build Program'' internal function sequence is pretty much
|
||
like the ,,Update dvi'' one but involving different commands.
|
||
See schematic:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Update dvi'' -> generate .tex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> invoke -> show latex errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on plain doc file
|
||
\backslash
|
||
latex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Update dvi'' -> generate same -> invoke
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> invoke -> show latex errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on literate doc file with .nw
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
latex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
extension
|
||
\backslash
|
||
_______ -> show literate errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Build Program'' -> generate same -> invoke
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> show compilation error
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on literate doc file with .nw
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
extension ( make )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Konfiguracja LyXa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are five new controls that you can put in your lyxrc file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
specifies which literate tool you are going to use.
|
||
During normal LyX configuration, the auto configuration script will try
|
||
to find the noweb package for you.
|
||
If the search is successful, the default value for this control is set
|
||
to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
noweave -delay -index
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otherwise the default value is set to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
none
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
specifies the filename extension to be used for literate documents.
|
||
Some literate tools requires specific file extension names.
|
||
The default is set during configuration as either
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.nw
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
or
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
none
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, depending on whether the auto configuration found the noweb package or
|
||
not.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
make
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
You need to create a makefile to do the tangling, compilation, etc.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Another way is to maintain the makefile or building script itself as part
|
||
of the document.
|
||
That way every project can be compiled with the same command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.nw | sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To use this scheme, create a script named
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
project-build
|
||
\family default
|
||
that executes the command above:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
#!/bin/sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script $1 | sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Finally set LyX to execute the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
project-build
|
||
\family default
|
||
script:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command project-build
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Every time you start a new project, define a scrap with name
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
build-script
|
||
\family default
|
||
that will do the compilation for that project.
|
||
Whenever you select
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Build Program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, LyX will extract that scrap (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script...
|
||
\family default
|
||
) and execute it (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
...|sh
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to ,,cat''.
|
||
If you compile the program given in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate_example.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can set:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
listerrors n
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
to process Noweb(noweave) error messages
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cat
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
If you compile the program given in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate_example.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can set:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
listerrors b
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
to process both Noweb(notangle) error messages and gcc error messages.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozszerzenia diagnostyczne
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There is also a new function implemented in the LyX server, the ,,server-goto-fi
|
||
le-row'' function, to be used with ddd/gdb or other debugger.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When debugging code with ddd/gdb, it is possible to invoke a text editor
|
||
at the current execution position with a single key stroke.
|
||
The default ddd configuration for that is shift-ctrl-V.
|
||
It happens that you can define the editor command line invocation in ddd
|
||
by accessing the edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
helpers window and changing the ,,Edit
|
||
Sources'' entry.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I take advantage of the new created LyX server function and this ddd feature,
|
||
and set
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Edit Sources
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
echo "LYXCMD:monitor:server-goto-file-row:@FILE@ @LINE@" >~/.lyxpipe.in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
With this, whenever you are using ddd and find a point in the program that
|
||
you want to edit, you just press shift-ctrl-V (in the ddd window), and
|
||
ddd you forward this information to LyX through the LyX server and then
|
||
the LyX window will show the same file with the cursor at the same position
|
||
ddd was pointing to.
|
||
No more guessing or long scrolling to locate a point in the program back
|
||
from debugging !
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note however that you must enable the LyX server to get this feature working
|
||
(it is disabled by default).
|
||
To enable it, insert in your lyxrc file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
serverpipe "/home/<your home directory>/.lyxpipe"
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Read the LyX server documentation for further information.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozszerzenia paska narzędzi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I created six new buttons that can be added to your LyX toolbar.
|
||
Five of these buttons are short cuts to layout styles: Standard, Section,
|
||
LaTeX, LyX-Code, and Scrap.
|
||
I created those because they are the ones I use most and I was tired of
|
||
scrolling the layout menu looking for the one I wanted.
|
||
The last one is a short cut to the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Build Program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
File menu entry.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX has a range of buttons that are available for tool bar customization.
|
||
In my toolbar I like to combine the six short cuts above with two more:
|
||
One for
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Update dvi
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and the other for
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
View dvi
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
File menu entries.
|
||
Here is how it looks like:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin_toolbar
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
layouts
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Scrap
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
separator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add buffer-view
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add buffer-typeset
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add build-program
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
separator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end_toolbar
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dopasowanie kolorów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a number of colors in LyX that can be customized.
|
||
For each one there are two ways to do it: either by inserting a line in
|
||
your X resource files, or by adding a flag in the LyX command line.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
One of the things that bothers people is the LaTeX font color.
|
||
The default color is red, since the scraps uses LaTeX font, and there is
|
||
a lot of scraps in literate documents, you may get tired of seeing everything
|
||
in red.
|
||
Example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*LatexColor: gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -LatexColor gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The next thing is the visible presence of the newline character in the screen.
|
||
You can choose the color of this particular character and make it blend
|
||
in the background.
|
||
I recommend you choosing a color that is close to the background but not
|
||
equal, that way you still can see it is there, but it is not bothering
|
||
you anymore.
|
||
Example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*BackgroundColor: gray20
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*NewLineColor: gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -BackgroundColor gray20 -NewLineColor gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you don't like a bright clear background burning your eyes all day long,
|
||
you can reverse background and foreground colors with this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*Reverse: 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -Reverse 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The problem with all those color alterations is that you may need to change
|
||
other colors as well to ensure that math, inset, etc, are
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
normal
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
with respect to the rest.
|
||
The following is the selection I use in my own X resource file.
|
||
It is just a suggestion.
|
||
I encourage you to try to find the color set that work best for you.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*Reverse: 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*MathColor: green
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*LatexColor: gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*OnOffLineColor: magenta
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*InsetColor: yellow
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*LightedColor: gray50
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*NewLineColor: gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*BackgroundColor: gray20
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Special features
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can do everything with LyX that you can do with LaTeX.
|
||
However, LyX cannot support every LaTeX feature directly.
|
||
But you can always use TeX Code.
|
||
This chapter shows you some more special things you might want to use.
|
||
For other special things you can do with figures, tables, floats, boxes
|
||
and notes, have a look at the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
EmbeddedObjects
|
||
\emph default
|
||
manual.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Multiple Text Columns
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
This feature is independent of the option
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Two-column document
|
||
\family default
|
||
in the document settings under
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Text Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
If you want to have 2
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns for the whole document, it is recommended to use the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Two-column document
|
||
\family default
|
||
option.
|
||
For all other cases use this feature.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To use multiple text columns in your document, you have to load the module
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Multiple Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
(menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Modules
|
||
\family default
|
||
) and must have the LaTeX-package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
multicol
|
||
\series default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Index idx
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
LaTeX-packages ! multicol
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
installed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Footnotes within multiple columns will be placed at the bottom of the page
|
||
and not under each column.
|
||
Within the different columns you can use everything, with the limitation
|
||
that for floats you need to use the float option
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Span columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Basics
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If you want to have 2 columns in your text, use the style
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
where the columns should start.
|
||
The content of the style is the number of the columns, so in this case
|
||
use a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
At the point where the columns should end use the style
|
||
\family sans
|
||
End Multiple Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
and keep it empty.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Here is an example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The Adventure of the Empty House
|
||
\series default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
It was in the spring of the year 1894 that all London was interested, and
|
||
the fashionable world dismayed, by the murder of the Honourable Ronald
|
||
Adair under most unusual and inexplicable circumstances.
|
||
The public has already learned those particulars of the crime which came
|
||
out in the police investigation, but a good deal was suppressed upon that
|
||
occasion, since the case for the prosecution was so overwhelmingly strong
|
||
that it was not necessary to bring forward all the facts.
|
||
Only now, at the end of nearly ten years, am I allowed to supply those
|
||
missing links which make up the whole of that remarkable chain.
|
||
The crime was of interest in itself, but that interest was as nothing to
|
||
me compared to the inconceivable sequel, which afforded me the greatest
|
||
shock and surprise of any event in my adventurous life.
|
||
Even now, after this long interval, I find myself thrilling as I think
|
||
of it, and feeling once more that sudden flood of joy, amazement, and increduli
|
||
ty which utterly submerged my mind.
|
||
Let me say to that public, which has shown some interest in those glimpses
|
||
which I have occasionally given them of the thoughts and actions of a very
|
||
remarkable man, that they are not to blame me if I have not shared my knowledge
|
||
with them, for I should have considered it my first duty to do so, had
|
||
I not been barred by a positive prohibition from his own lips, which was
|
||
only withdrawn upon the third of last month.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Here is an example with 3
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
It can be imagined that my close intimacy with Sherlock Holmes had interested
|
||
me deeply in crime, and that after his disappearance I never failed to
|
||
read with care the various problems which came before the public.
|
||
And I even attempted, more than once, for my own private satisfaction,
|
||
to employ his methods in their solution, though with indifferent success.
|
||
There was none, however, which appealed to me like this tragedy of Ronald
|
||
Adair.
|
||
As I read the evidence at the inquest, which led up to a verdict of willful
|
||
murder against some person or persons unknown, I realized more clearly
|
||
than I had ever done the loss which the community had sustained by the
|
||
death of Sherlock Holmes.
|
||
There were points about this strange business which would, I was sure,
|
||
have specially appealed to him, and the efforts of the police would have
|
||
been supplemented, or more probably anticipated, by the trained observation
|
||
and the alert mind of the first criminal agent in Europe.
|
||
All day, as I drove upon my round, I turned over the case in my mind and
|
||
found no explanation which appeared to me to be adequate.
|
||
At the risk of telling a twice-told tale, I will recapitulate the facts
|
||
as they were known to the public at the conclusion of the inquest.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can have up to 10
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns if you want to, but that might not be very pleasant for the readers
|
||
of your document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Columns inside Columns
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can also have columns inside columns:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The Honourable Ronald Adair was the second son of the Earl of Maynooth,
|
||
at that time governor of one of the Australian colonies.
|
||
Adair's mother had returned from Australia to undergo the operation for
|
||
cataract, and she, her son Ronald, and her daughter Hilda were living together
|
||
at 427 Park Lane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The youth moved in the best society–had, so far as was known, no enemies
|
||
and no particular vices.
|
||
He had been engaged to Miss Edith Woodley, of Carstairs, but the engagement
|
||
had been broken off by mutual consent some months before, and there was
|
||
no sign that it had left any very profound feeling behind it.
|
||
For the rest {sic} the man's life moved in a narrow and conventional circle,
|
||
for his habits were quiet and his nature unemotional.
|
||
Yet it was upon this easy-going young aristocrat that death came, in most
|
||
strange and unexpected form, between the hours of ten and eleven-twenty
|
||
on the night of March 30, 1894.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Ronald Adair was fond of cards–playing continually, but never for such stakes
|
||
as would hurt him.
|
||
He was a member of the Baldwin, the Cavendish, and the Bagatelle card clubs.
|
||
It was shown that, after dinner on the day of his death, he had played
|
||
a rubber of whist at the latter club.
|
||
He had also played there in the afternoon.
|
||
|
||
\size default
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
The evidence of those who had played with him– Mr.
|
||
Murray, Sir John Hardy, and Colonel Moran–showed that the game was whist,
|
||
and that there was a fairly equal fall of the cards.
|
||
Adair might have lost five pounds, but not more.
|
||
His fortune was a considerable one, and such a loss could not in any way
|
||
affect him.
|
||
He had played nearly every day at one club or other, but he was a cautious
|
||
player, and usually rose a winner.
|
||
It came out in evidence that, in partnership with Colonel Moran, he had
|
||
actually won as much as four hundred and twenty pounds in a sitting, some
|
||
weeks before, from Godfrey Milner and Lord Balmoral.
|
||
So much for his recent history as it came out at the inquest.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Advanced Examples
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The examples in this section show some more special features of multiple
|
||
columns.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For more features of multiple columns, have a look at the documentation
|
||
of the LaTeX-package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
multicol
|
||
\series default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Index idx
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
LaTeX-packages ! multicol
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset citation
|
||
LatexCommand cite
|
||
key "multicol"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Preface
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To add a preface text for multiple columns, add the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
}[
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
as TeX Code behind the number of columns in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
style.
|
||
behind the command write the text.
|
||
At the end of the style use the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
]{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
as TeX Code.
|
||
An example with some preface text:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}[
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
And the story continues and continues and continues and continues\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
]{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
On the evening of the crime, he returned from the club exactly at ten.
|
||
His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
|
||
The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second
|
||
floor, generally used as his sitting-room.
|
||
She had lit a fire there, and as it smoked she had opened the window.
|
||
No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty, the hour of the return
|
||
of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
|
||
Desiring to say good-night, she attempted to enter her son's room.
|
||
The door was locked on the inside, and no answer could be got to their
|
||
cries and knocking.
|
||
Help was obtained, and the door forced.
|
||
The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
|
||
His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet, but
|
||
no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can also use a section heading as the preface if you use a section command
|
||
as TeX Code behind the first TeX Code.
|
||
For example the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsection{subsection title}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
creates a subsection.
|
||
In this example the preface is a subsubsection:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}[
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsubsection{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is a subsubsection heading as a preface
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
]{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
A minute examination of the circumstances served only to make the case more
|
||
complex.
|
||
In the first place, no reason could be given why the young man should have
|
||
fastened the door upon the inside.
|
||
There was the possibility that the murderer had done this, and had afterwards
|
||
escaped by the window.
|
||
The drop was at least twenty feet, however, and a bed of crocuses in full
|
||
bloom lay beneath.
|
||
Neither the flowers nor the earth showed any sign of having been disturbed,
|
||
nor were there any marks upon the narrow strip of grass which separated
|
||
the house from the road.
|
||
Apparently, therefore, it was the young man himself who had fastened the
|
||
door.
|
||
But how did he come by his death? No one could have climbed up to the window
|
||
without leaving traces.
|
||
Suppose a man had fired through the window, he would indeed be a remarkable
|
||
shot who could with a revolver inflict so deadly a wound.
|
||
Again, Park Lane is a frequented thoroughfare; there is a cab stand within
|
||
a hundred yards of the house.
|
||
No one had heard a shot.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If there is less vertical space left on the page at the beginning of the
|
||
multiple columns than needed for 6
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
text lines, a page break will be inserted before the multiple columns.
|
||
Depending on the number of lines of the preface text, you might want to
|
||
change this value.
|
||
It is determined by inserting the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
][number
|
||
\backslash
|
||
baselineskip
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
as TeX Code behind the preface definition but before the final
|
||
\series bold
|
||
]{
|
||
\series default
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
number
|
||
\emph default
|
||
is hereby the number of text lines.
|
||
In this example the space is set to 7
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
text lines:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}[
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsubsection{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is the sectioning command
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
as a preface and
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
with multiple text lines
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
][7
|
||
\backslash
|
||
baselineskip
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
]{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
On the evening of the crime, he returned from the club exactly at ten.
|
||
His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
|
||
The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second
|
||
floor, generally used as his sitting-room.
|
||
She had lit a fire there, and as it smoked she had opened the window.
|
||
No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty, the hour of the return
|
||
of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
|
||
Desiring to say good-night, she attempted to enter her son's room.
|
||
The door was locked on the inside, and no answer could be got to their
|
||
cries and knocking.
|
||
Help was obtained, and the door forced.
|
||
The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
|
||
His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet, but
|
||
no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Free Space
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The amount of space before and after multiple columns can be changed by
|
||
changing the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
.
|
||
For example the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{3cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
in TeX Code changes its value to 3
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm.
|
||
The change must be made before the multiple columns' start.
|
||
The predefined value is 13
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For this example
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
was set to 2.5
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{2.5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
All day I turned these facts over in my mind, endeavouring to hit upon some
|
||
theory which could reconcile them all, and to find that line of least resistanc
|
||
e which my poor friend had declared to be the starting-point of every investigat
|
||
ion.
|
||
I confess that I made little progress.
|
||
In the evening I strolled across the Park, and found myself about six o'clock
|
||
at the Oxford Street end of Park Lane.
|
||
A group of loafers upon the pavements, all staring up at a particular window,
|
||
directed me to the house which I had come to see.
|
||
A tall, thin man with coloured glasses, whom I strongly suspected of being
|
||
a plain-clothes detective, was pointing out some theory of his own, while
|
||
the others crowded round to listen to what he said.
|
||
I got as near him as I could, but his observations seemed to me to be absurd,
|
||
so I withdrew again in some disgust.
|
||
As I did so I struck against an elderly, deformed man, who had been behind
|
||
me, and I knocked down several books which he was carrying.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Note Greyedout
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Note:
|
||
\series default
|
||
The values you set with
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength
|
||
\series default
|
||
will be used for all following multiple columns until to change them again.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{13pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Column Width and Separation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The width of the columns is automatically calculated, but you can modify
|
||
the space between the columns.
|
||
This is done by changing the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
.
|
||
Its predefined value is 10
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt.
|
||
Here is an example where
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
is set to 3
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep}{3cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
My observations of No.
|
||
\begin_inset space \space{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
427 Park Lane did little to clear up the problem in which I was interested.
|
||
The house was separated from the street by a low wall and railing, the
|
||
whole not more than five feet high.
|
||
It was perfectly easy, therefore, for anyone to get into the garden, but
|
||
the window was entirely inaccessible, since there was no water pipe or
|
||
anything which could help the most active man to climb it.
|
||
More puzzled than ever, I retraced my steps to Kensington.
|
||
I had not been in my study five minutes when the maid entered to say that
|
||
a person desired to see me.
|
||
To my astonishment it was none other than my strange old book collector,
|
||
his sharp, wizened face peering out from a frame of white hair, and his
|
||
precious volumes, a dozen of them at least, wedged under his right arm.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep}{10pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Vertical Lines
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Between the columns a rule with a width of the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule
|
||
\series default
|
||
is placed.
|
||
If this rule width is set to 0
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt (this is the default), the rule is suppressed.
|
||
In the following example, the line separating the columns is 2
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt wide.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule}{2pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Begin Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You're surprised to see me, sir,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
said he, in a strange, croaking voice.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
I acknowledged that I was.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Well, I've a conscience, sir, and when I chanced to see you go into this
|
||
house, as I came hobbling after you, I thought to myself, I'll just step
|
||
in and see that kind gentleman, and tell him that if I was a bit gruff
|
||
in my manner there was not any harm meant, and that I am much obliged to
|
||
him for picking up my books.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You make too much of a trifle,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
said I.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
May I ask how you knew who I was?
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Well, sir, if it isn't too great a liberty, I am a neighbour of yours, for
|
||
you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street, and very
|
||
happy to see you, I am sure.
|
||
Maybe you collect yourself, sir.
|
||
Here's
|
||
\noun on
|
||
British
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Birds
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, and
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Catullus
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, and
|
||
\noun on
|
||
The Holy War
|
||
\noun default
|
||
--a bargain, every one of them.
|
||
With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
|
||
It looks untidy, does it not, sir?
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout End Multiple Columns
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule}{0pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Niestandardowe kształty akapitów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newdimen
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit}{4.5in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parshape 25 0.45
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.332
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.40
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.300
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.35
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.293
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.30
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.300
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.25
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.317
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.20
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.342
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.15
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.373
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.10
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.410
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.05
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.453
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.00
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.500
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.05
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.453
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.10
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.410
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.15
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.373
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.20
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.342
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.25
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.317
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.30
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.300
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.35
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.300
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.40
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.300
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.45
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.320
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.50
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.320
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.55
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.330
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.60
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.330
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.65
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.330
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.70
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.340
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
0.75
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit 0.340
|
||
\backslash
|
||
varunit
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Oto nadszedł czas, w
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
którym musimy obalić tyranię prostokątnych akapitów.
|
||
W tej sytuacji, wywołamy do tego radosne polecenie plain TeX-a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parshape
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jak możesz zobaczyć, w pełni dowolny kształt może być osiągnięty przez
|
||
odpowiednie ustawienie definicji długości wiersza.
|
||
Ten kształt akapitu może wyglądać trochę idiotycznie, chyba że wyobrazimy
|
||
sobie sytuację taką jak dokładnie ustawione inicjały, oblane tekstem rysunki
|
||
o nieregularnym kształcie itp.
|
||
dające wrażenie ręcznej pracy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Składnia:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parshape numlines #1indent #1length #2indent #2length \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
#nindent #nlength
|
||
\family default
|
||
, gdzie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
numlines
|
||
\family default
|
||
określa liczbę wierszy tekstu która definiuje akapit.
|
||
Jeśli liczba wierszy będzie mniejsza od założonej, to kształt zostanie
|
||
skrócony.
|
||
Jeśli zaś wierszy będzie więcej niż założono, to kolejne nadmiarowe wiersze
|
||
zachowają parametry ostatniego definiowanego wiersza.
|
||
Dyrektywy
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
#nindent
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
#nlength
|
||
\family default
|
||
określają odstęp wiersza od lewego marginesu i długość wiersza mierzone
|
||
w punktach.
|
||
Kształt dotyczy tylko bieżącego akapitu, następny akapit jest formatowany
|
||
normalnie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Bibliography
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
|
||
LatexCommand bibitem
|
||
key "multicol"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Documentation of the LaTeX-package
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset href
|
||
LatexCommand href
|
||
name "multicol"
|
||
target "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Index idx
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
LaTeX-packages ! multicol
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_body
|
||
\end_document
|